JP2018030023A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of excellently dealing with path abnormality between devices.SOLUTION: When supply of operation power is started, a communication confirmation command is transmitted from a main-side MPU 83 to a voice/light side MPU 93. The voice/light side MPU 93 performs notification processing when the communication confirmation command is not received within a monitoring time. The main-side MPU 83 transmits a confirmation command to a put-out side MPU 163 after a communication confirmation command is transmitted. The communication put-out side MPU 163 of the voice/light side transmits a reception confirmation command to the main-side MPU 83 when it receives the reception confirmation command. The main-side MPU 83 transmits to the voice/light side MPU 93 the reception confirmation command when the reception confirmation command is received. The voice/light side MPU 93 performs notification processing when the reception confirmation command is not received within a monitoring time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a plurality of control devices are known. In the gaming machine, the progress of the game is controlled by executing predetermined control in each control device while communicating between the plurality of control devices.

  As a configuration including the plurality of control devices, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including a main control device and a payout control device is known. The main controller determines whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance part provided in the game area, and when the entrance to the entrance part corresponding to the payout of the game ball occurs The award ball command is output from the main control device to the payout control device. The payout control device drives and controls the payout device so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a main control device and an effect control device. In the main control device, when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance portion provided in the game area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a favorable hit state is generated for the player, and an effect corresponding to the lottery result The command is output to the effect control device. In the effect control device, the liquid crystal display device and the speaker are controlled so that the effect corresponding to the effect command is executed, and the effect corresponding to the lottery result is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2009-213766 A JP2011-110091A

  Here, when a path abnormality such as a communication path occurs between apparatuses, it is necessary to be able to cope with it appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably cope with a path abnormality between devices.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes specific control means for executing specific control based on information transmitted by the predetermined means,
The predetermined means is
Means for transmitting predetermined information corresponding to whether or not there is an abnormality in a path between other gaming machine components when supply of operating power is started;
Means for transmitting another information to the specific control means when the supply of operating power is started;
With
The specific control means includes
Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not the predetermined information transmitted by the predetermined means has been received before a predetermined monitoring period elapses when supply of operating power is started;
A predetermined response unit configured to be in a predetermined notification state when the predetermined information is not received before the predetermined monitoring period elapses;
Specific monitoring means for monitoring whether or not the different information transmitted by the predetermined means has been received before the specific monitoring period elapses when supply of operating power is started;
Specific correspondence means for causing a specific notification state when the different information is not received before the specific monitoring period has passed;
With
The predetermined monitoring period is assumed as a period required to normally receive the predetermined information after specifying whether or not there is an abnormality in the path between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine component devices. Set to be longer than the longest possible period,
When the supply of the operating power is started, the process for setting the supply start state is started before the specific control means with respect to the predetermined means,
The notification content is different between the predetermined notification state and the specific notification state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably cope with a path abnormality between apparatuses.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the channel | path structure formed inside the dispensing device. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the structure of a game ball distribution part. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning detection process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout output process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for full tanks in payout side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode when a lower plate is a full tank state. It is a flowchart which shows the ball useless process in payout side MPU. (A) It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electrical structure of the game hall where many pachinko machines were installed, (b) It is a front view of the external terminal board provided in the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure for performing a signal output through the external terminal for main body opening, and the external terminal for front door opening. It is a flowchart which shows the main body frame open | release signal monitoring process in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state reception process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball setting process in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state setting process in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball permission signal setting process in payout side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the output of a prize ball command with respect to a prize ball permission signal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure about communication between each MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on wait process of the main side in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the communication confirmation process by the side of payout in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on wait process of the payout side in payout side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the communication abnormality monitoring at the time of power activation. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the setting of the prize ball permission signal at the time of power-on. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure regarding the electrical connection of the paying ball | bowl detection sensor and monitoring IC, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the signal input to monitoring IC. . It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection short circuit monitoring process in payout side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the mode of disconnection short circuit monitoring. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process by the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout output process by the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball permission signal setting process by the payout side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball unnecessary process by the payout side MPU in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an expanded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And. A main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the main body frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. A window portion 21 is formed on the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 22 having transparency.

  A display light emitting unit 23 is provided above the window 21 in the front door frame 14. The display light-emitting unit 23 incorporates a light-emitting body such as an LED, and is turned on or blinking according to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and responds to the occurrence of an abnormality at a predetermined abnormality Lighting or blinking is performed in the manner described above. A pair of left and right speaker portions 26 are provided on the left and right corners in the upper region of the front door frame 14. The speaker unit 26 outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormality when a predetermined abnormality occurs.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. The lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  The lower bulging portion 32 has a discharge operation portion 35 that is operated to discharge game balls stored in the lower tray 34 to a ball receiving box (not shown) disposed below the lower bulging portion 32. Is provided. The discharge operation unit 35 is provided so as to be able to open and close a ball extraction hole 36 formed in the bottom of the lower plate 34. In the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is arranged at the closed position, the ball punching hole 36 is in the closed state, the discharge of the game ball from the lower plate 34 is prevented, and in the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is arranged in the open position. The ball removal hole 36 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to be discharged from the lower tray 34. An electric actuator is not provided for the discharge operation unit 35, and it is necessary to manually operate the discharge operation unit 35 in order to move the discharge operation unit 35 between the closed position and the open position. Moreover, although the discharge operation part 35 is urged | biased toward the closed position, the discharge operation part 35 is made into an open position by utilizing the engagement relationship between the discharge operation part 35 and the lower side bulging part 32. It is the structure which can be made to hold | maintain. When the holding state is released, the discharge operation unit 35 is returned to the closed position.

  A game ball launching handle 37 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude to the near side. When the game ball launch handle 37 is operated, a game ball launch mechanism described later is driven and controlled, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are launched.

  Next, the main body frame 13 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame opening sensor 42 that detects whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened is provided on the upper portion of the resin base 41. The front door frame opening sensor 42 has a pin that can be projected and retracted from the front surface of the resin base 41. When the front door frame 14 is closed in the main body frame 13, the pin is pushed in and the front door frame 14 is detected to be closed. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the pin returns to the protruding position, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected.

  Incidentally, the front door frame opening sensor 42 outputs a HI-level front door frame opening signal to a later-described payout control device when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and LOW when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. Outputs the front door frame opening signal of level. However, the signal output mode is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 43 is formed at the center of the resin base 41. A game board 51 is detachably attached to the resin base 41. The game board 51 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 43 of the resin base 41.

  The structure of the game board 51 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 51.

  An inner rail portion 51a and an outer rail portion 51b are attached to the game board 51 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b guide means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 45 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 43 in the resin base 41 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 45 has a launch rail 46 that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 47 that feeds the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the launch rail 46, and a supply onto the launch rail 46. And a solenoid 48 that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball directed toward the guide rail. When the game ball launch handle 37 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the ball feeding device 47 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is supplied onto the launch rail 46 and the solenoid 48 is driven. By being controlled, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  The game board 51 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 52, a special prize winning device 53, a first operating port 54, a second operating port 55, a through gate 56, a symbol display device 61, a special figure unit 62, a universal figure unit 63, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 56, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any of the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when 10 balls are paid out to the general winning opening 52, 10 winning balls are paid out, and 15 when the winning into the special winning device 53 occurs. When a prize ball is paid out and a ball enters the first operation port 54, three prize balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operation port 55. The payout of one prize ball is executed.

  Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls in the second operation port 55 is smaller than that in the first operation port 54, the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second working port 55 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first working port 54.

  In addition, an out port 58 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 51, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 58. The game board 51 is provided with a large number of nails 59 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 58, the general winning port 52, the special prize winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 are used. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 51. Both the first working port 54 and the second working port 55 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 54 and 55 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 54 is located upward. The second operating port 55 is provided with a general electric utility 55a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 55a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 55, and the winning of the second operating port 55 becomes possible when the electric utility item 55a is opened.

  A through gate 56 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 55 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 56 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 56 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 56 can win the second operating port 55.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 56, the universal power 55 a of the second operating port 55 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 56 as a trigger, and a normal display of the general-purpose unit 63 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The display 63 fluctuates and displays the pattern. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 63a is terminated, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 55a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general map display unit 63a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 63a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 63, a universal map display 63b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display 63a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 56 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose hold display portion 63b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the special figure unit 62 and the symbol display device 61.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display section 62a. The display area of the special figure display unit 62 a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 61. In the special figure display unit 62a, a winning lottery is performed using a winning at the first operating port 54 or a winning at the second operating port 55 as a trigger, and thereby a change display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 62a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 62a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

  In the special figure unit 62, a special figure holding display part 62b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 62a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display section 62b.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 61 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 61 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 61, when the special symbol display unit 62a performs a variation display or a predetermined display on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or winning in the second operating port 55, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 61, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode described later that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  The display contents when the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device 61 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, the symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. The stop is displayed. Further, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right descending line L4, and a right ascending line L5. Is set.

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. The variable display starts to scroll in the direction. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is either the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result, which will be described later, the same symbol combination is placed on any active line. It is formed. Further, in the case of an explicit high probability winning result which will be described later, the same symbol combination is not formed on any effective line, but a predetermined symbol combination is formed on any effective line.

  In addition, based on the winning in any one of the operation ports 54 and 55, the display is started in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, when a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 54 or the winning to the second operating port 55, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 53. Transition to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 53 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 51 and an open / close door 53a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 53a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 53a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, in the main body frame 13 in which the game board 51 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 41, the launch rail 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 45 and the outer rail portions 51 a and 51 b of the game board 51, There is a gap of a predetermined interval between them, and a foul ball passage 72 formed in the passage formation unit 71 of the front door frame 14 exists below the gap. Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 45 does not reach the upper part of the game area PA and returns to the guide rail constituted by the inner and outer rail portions 51a and 51b, the foul ball Enters the foul ball path 72. The game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 72 are discharged to the lower tray 34.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The main control device 81 includes a main control board that manages and manages the progress of the game in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  A sound emission control device 91 is provided above the main control device 81 on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The sound light emission control device 91 includes a sound light emission control board that performs sound output control, light emission control, and display control device control in accordance with instructions from the main control device 81, and the sound light emission control board is accommodated in a substrate box. .

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 in addition to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 101, and a payout mechanism portion 102, a discharge passage board 103, and a control device assembly unit 104 are attached to the back pack 101. . The back pack 101 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 7, a base portion 111 to which the payout mechanism portion 102 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 112. The entire sound emission control device 91 is covered from the rear by the protective cover portion 112, and a part of the main control device 81 is covered from the rear.

  The base portion 111 is provided with an external terminal plate 113 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 113 is provided with various external terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these external terminals.

  The base part 111 is provided with a body frame opening sensor 114 that detects whether or not the body frame 13 is opened outside the external terminal plate 113. When the body frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the metal contact of the body frame opening sensor 114 is closed and the closing of the body frame 13 is detected. When the body frame 13 is opened, the metal contact is opened and the body frame 13 is opened. Is to be detected.

  Incidentally, the main body frame opening sensor 114 outputs a HI level main body frame opening signal to a payout control device to be described later when the main body frame 13 is in an open state, and when the main body frame 13 is in a closed state, the main body frame opening sensor 114 is at a low level. Output an open signal. However, the signal output mode is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  The base part 111 is provided with a fastener 115 for fastening to the main body frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the main body frame 13 by setting the fastener 115 in a fastening state. On the other hand, the back pack unit 15 can be rotated from the main body frame 13 by releasing the fastening state of the fastener 115.

  In the base portion 111, a payout mechanism portion 102 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 112. That is, a tank 121 opened upward is provided at the uppermost part of the back pack 101, and the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 121. A tank rail 122 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 121, and a case rail 123 extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 122. A dispensing device 124 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 123.

  The case rail 123 is provided with a ball non-detection sensor 123a so as to detect a game ball connected from the tank 121 to the payout device 124 through a passage in the case rail 123. The ball non-detection sensor 123a is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. The ball non-detection sensor 123a is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. .

  The ball non-detection sensor 123a outputs an electrical signal to a payout control device described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting. In the payout control device, it is determined whether or not the tank 121 is in a no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor 123a.

  The case rail 123 is provided with a ball removal operation switch 123b. For example, when the game balls stored in the tank 121 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, the ball removal operation switch 123b is pressed when all the game balls on the case rail 123 are discharged, and the case rail 123 and its downstream side The game balls stored in the game can be discharged.

  The payout device 124 pays out game balls. The configuration of the payout device 124 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a passage structure formed in the dispensing device 124. In FIG. 8, a game ball flowing down inside the payout device 124 is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  The housing 131 of the payout device 124 is formed with a game ball inlet 132 for taking in a game ball supplied from the case rail 123 at the upper end, and a game that has entered from the game ball inlet 132 inside. A game ball passage 133 for allowing the ball to pass therethrough is provided.

  The game ball passage 133 communicates with a game ball outlet 134 formed at the lower end of the housing 131, and the game balls entering from the game ball inlet 132 flow down one by one toward the game ball outlet 134. An accommodation portion 135 having a passage width widened to the left and right is provided in an intermediate portion of the game ball passage 133, and the rotating body 136 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 135. The center of the rotating body 136 is fixed to the output shaft of the payout motor 137.

  The payout motor 137 is constituted by a stepping motor, and the output shaft is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise as viewed in FIG. 8). The output shaft is set to advance one step by giving a drive signal of 1 pulse and to make one rotation by giving a drive signal of 360 pulses.

  Concave portions 136a are formed at two positions on the periphery of the rotating body 136 at intervals of 180 °. The recess 136a has a curved surface, and the curvature thereof is approximately the same as the curvature of the game ball. In addition, the distance between the portion between the recess 136a on the periphery of the rotating body 136 and the passage wall of the storage portion 135 is shorter than the diameter dimension of the game ball, whereas the passage between the recess 136a and the storage portion 135 The distance to the wall is longer than the diameter dimension of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 133 reaches the recess 136 a of the rotating body 136, the gaming ball is led to the downstream side as the rotating body 136 rotates.

  In the game ball passage 133, a payout ball detection sensor 138 having a substantially flat plate shape is installed at a position downstream of the housing portion 135. The payout ball detection sensor 138 is configured by a known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, converts a change in the magnetic field caused by the passing of the game ball through the through hole into an electric signal, and outputs the electric signal to a payout control device described later. . Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting. The number of game balls paid out via the payout device 124 can be confirmed by the payout ball detection sensor 138.

  In addition, although description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the said game ball | bowl channel | path 133 is formed so that an exit side may become 1 row, whereas it is formed so that an entrance side may be 2 rows. The rotating body 136 is individually provided for the passages on the inlet side of the two rows. In this case, the recesses 136a are formed at intervals of 180 ° for one passage, but the positions of the recesses 136a are shifted by 90 ° between the pair of passages. Therefore, even if the entrance-side passages are arranged in two rows as described above, one game ball is alternately paid out from each entrance-side passage to the exit-side passage. The payout period of the game balls that are alternately paid out is constant according to the driving speed of the payout motor 137. The game balls that are alternately paid out one by one are detected by a payout ball detection sensor 138 provided in the passage on the exit side.

  The game balls paid out from the payout device 124 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 125 provided in the base portion 111 of the back pack 101 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 124. The game ball distributing unit 125 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 124 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and the discharge passage.

  A configuration for distributing game balls in the game ball distribution unit 125 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a longitudinal sectional view of the game ball distributing unit 125 and its periphery.

  The game balls paid out from the payout device 124 flow down the payout passage 141 and are introduced into the game ball distribution unit 125 formed at the lower end of the payout mechanism unit 102. The game ball distribution unit 125 is open upward and forward, and the inside thereof is partitioned by two partition walls 142 and 143, so that three openings 144, 145 and 146 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction.

  The opening 146 on the outside of the pachinko machine 10 leads to a discharge passage for discharging the game balls toward the island facility, and in the discharge operation of the game balls stored in the tank 121, the stored game balls are opened on the outside. It is guided to the discharge passage via 146 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  The game ball that has reached the opening 144 on the inside of the pachinko machine 10 passes through a passage portion (not shown) provided on the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13 and is provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIG. It is introduced into the passage portion of the forming unit 71 and discharged to the upper plate 33. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the central opening 145 is introduced into the passage portion of the passage formation unit 71 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 through a passage portion (not shown) provided in the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13. And discharged to the lower plate 34.

  The passage forming unit 71 is formed of a synthetic resin, and a passage portion that communicates with the upper plate 33 and a passage portion that communicates with the lower plate 34 are formed. In the passage forming unit 71, a receiving port portion 73 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 71. An entrance portion of the passage portion and an entrance portion of the passage portion to the lower plate 34 are formed.

  While the receiving portion 73 of the passage forming unit 71 is formed to open upward, the outlet portion 151 of the passage portion provided in the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13 is formed to open downward. Yes. In a state where the front door frame 14 is closed to the main body frame 13, the outlet portion 151 faces the receiving portion 73 from above, and a game ball passing through the outlet portion 151 is received by the receiving portion 73. It is discharged to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34.

  A shutter 152 that opens and closes the outlet 151 is attached to the resin base 41 below the outlet 151. The shutter 152 is supported by a support shaft 153 provided at the lower end thereof so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and further provided with a biasing member (not shown) that biases the front portion to close the outlet portion 151. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the shutter 152 rises as shown in the figure and closes the outlet 151. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state in which the game balls are connected to the upstream side of the outlet portion 151, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game balls spill out. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 152 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving port 73 of the passage forming unit 71. In this state, the outlet portion 151 and the receiving portion 73 communicate with each other.

  The opening 73 is open upward, and the shutter 152 moves forward following the opening 73 when the front door frame 14 is opened. Thereby, even if the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where a large number of game balls are stored in the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34 and the game balls are connected to the upstream side of the outlet portion 151, the receiving portion 73. The ball can be cut by the shutter 152 while receiving the game ball at, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing out.

  In the configuration in which the passages to the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 are formed as described above, as shown in FIG. 9, the full tank detection sensor for detecting whether or not the lower plate 34 is in a full state. 147 is provided for the central opening 145 in the game ball distributor 125. The full tank detection sensor 147 is configured by a photo sensor. The full tank detection sensor 147 is not limited to a photo sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a magnetic detection type proximity sensor or a limit sensor may be used. .

  The full tank detection sensor 147 outputs an electrical signal to a payout control device described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the HI / LOW relationship may be reversed. In the payout control device, it is specified based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor 147 whether or not the lower tray 34 is in a full state.

  Returning to the description using FIG. 7, the back-pack substrate 126 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 102. The back pack substrate 126 is supplied with, for example, a main power of 24 volts AC, and is turned on or off by a manual switching operation of the power switch 126a.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board 103 and the control device collective unit 104 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 111 so as to sandwich the lower end portion. A discharge passage is formed in the discharge passage board 103, and the game balls that flow down the game area PA and are led to the back side of the game board 51 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the control device assembly unit 104 is equipped with a payout control device 161, a power supply / launch control device 171, and a ball rental connection terminal plate 181. The payout control device 161, the power supply / launch control device 171, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 181 are arranged such that the payout control device 161 and the ball lending connection terminal plate 181 are located behind the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is arranged so as to be in front of and behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 161 contains a payout control board for controlling the payout device 124 in a colorless and transparent substrate box. The payout control device 161 is provided with a state display portion 161a by being mounted on a payout control board housed in a board box. In the status display unit 161a, the monitoring result is notified regarding the monitoring target in the payout control device 161. The status display unit 161a is provided as a 7-segment display using LEDs, but is not limited to this, and may be a dot display unit or a liquid crystal display device. The payout control device 161 is provided with a state return switch 161b. For example, when the state return switch 161b is pressed when a payout error occurs such as a ball jam in the payout device 124, the ball jam is eliminated. Further, in the situation where the monitoring result is notified in the state display unit 161a, the notification in the state display unit 161a is canceled by pressing the state return switch 161b after eliminating the event that has caused the notification. The However, for some events, even if the state return switch 161b is pressed, the notification state of the state display unit 161a is not released.

  The power source / launch control device 171 contains a power source and launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices, and further, a game ball launch by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 37 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 171 is provided with a RAM erase switch 171a. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the interruption is stored and retained. It is like that.

  The ball lending connection terminal plate 181 is electrically connected to a ball lending device provided on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a payout control device 161, and a ball lending operation device on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and is mainly lended by a player. An operation command is taken in and output to the payout control device 161.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 82 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 83 is mounted on the main control board 82. The MPU 83 includes a ROM 84 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 83 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 84 is executed. A RAM 85, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 83, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 83 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board (not shown) provided in the main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 83 and a payout controller 161 is connected. The power failure monitoring board is connected to the power / fire control board 172 of the power / fire control device 171 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 83 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 52a, 53b, 54a, 55b, and 56a are connected to the input side of the MPU 83. The various winning detection sensors 52 a, 53 b, 54 a, 55 b, and 56 a have a prize winning corresponding ball portion such as a general winning port 52, special electric winning device 53, first operating port 54, second operating port 55, and through gate 56. A detection sensor provided on a one-to-one basis is included, and the MPU 83 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, in the MPU 83, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first working port 54 and the second working port 55.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a power failure monitoring board, a payout control device 161, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 161 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a special electric drive unit 53 c that opens and closes the special electric side opening / closing door 53 a of the special electric prize winning device 53, and a general electric drive unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 55 a of the second operating port 55. 55c, special figure unit 62 and universal figure unit 63 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display part 62 a and a special figure holding display part 62 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Similarly, the universal map unit 63 is provided with a universal map display unit 63 a and a universal map hold display unit 63 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 82, and the MPU 83 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the special electricity driving unit 53c so that the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 55a is elected in the open state, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the power generator 55c so that the power utility item 55a is opened and closed. In each game round and opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 62 is executed in the MPU 83. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the utility model 55a is clearly indicated, the MPU 83 executes display control of the universal unit 63.

  The power failure monitoring board relays between the main control board 82 and the power / fire control board 172, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control board 172.

  The payout control device 161 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 124 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81. The payout control device 161 includes a payout control board 162, and an MPU 163 is mounted on the payout control board 162. The MPU 163 includes a ROM 164 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 163, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 165 that is used as a work memory.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 83, ROM 84 and RAM 85 of the main control board 82 are referred to as the main MPU 83, main ROM 84 and main RAM 85, and the MPU 163, ROM 164 and RAM 165 of the payout control board 162 are dispensed. These are referred to as a side MPU 163, a payout ROM 164, and a payout RAM 165.

  The payout side MPU 163 is provided with an input / output port. The input side of the payout side MPU 163 is connected to a main control board 82, a power source / launch control board 172, and a ball lending connection terminal plate 181 provided in the back pack unit 15. Further, the payout ball detection sensor 138 of the payout device 124 is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 163 so that the number of game balls actually paid out toward the downstream side can be grasped. Yes. In addition, the front door frame opening sensor 42, the main body frame opening sensor 114, the ball non-detecting sensor 123a, and the full tank detecting sensor 147 are electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 163. .

  On the other hand, the main control board 82 and the ball lending connection terminal plate 181 are connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 163. In addition, a payout motor 137 of the payout device 124 is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 163, and by driving and controlling the payout motor 137, a game ball directed toward the downstream side by the payout device 124. Make a payout.

  The ball lending connection terminal board 181 is a board for relaying the electrical connection between the payout control board 162 and the ball lending apparatus Y. The payout-side MPU 163 controls the rental of balls by inputting / outputting electric signals to / from the ball rental apparatus Y.

  The power supply / launch control board 172 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 45, and the game ball launch mechanism 45 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the power source / launch control board 172 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 82, the payout control device 161, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply / launch control board 172 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 173 and a power-off power supply unit 174 for supplying the operating power. The power-on power supply unit 173 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source. It has the function to do. The power supply unit 174 for power interruption includes a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 173 for power-on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 174 is discharged from the power interruption. The storage holding power is supplied to the side RAM 85. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the main RAM 85 is stored and held without being erased while the storage holding power is supplied from the power interruption power supply unit 174.

  More specifically, the power from the power-on power supply unit 173 is supplied to the VCC terminal of the main MPU 83 and the VCC terminal of the payout MPU 163. In a situation where power is supplied from the external power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 83 and 163, and information is stored and held in the RAMs 85 and 165. Is called.

  On the other hand, the electric power from the power interruption power supply unit 174 is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 83 and is not supplied to the VBB terminal of the payout MPU 163. The VBB terminal is a terminal that can selectively supply power to the RAMs 85 and 165 in a situation where power supply to the VCC terminal is interrupted. In this case, as described above, power is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 83 from the power supply unit 174 for power interruption, but the power is not supplied to the VBB terminal of the payout MPU 163. The power from the hour power supply unit 174 is supplied to the main RAM 85 but is not supplied to the payout RAM 165.

  Note that the VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 163 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring. Further, instead of the configuration in which the power supplied to the VCC terminal in each of the MPUs 83 and 163 is supplied to both the arithmetic unit and the RAMs 85 and 165, the power supplied to the VCC terminal is supplied only to the arithmetic unit, and VBB Only power supplied to the terminals may be supplied to the RAMs 85 and 165. In this case, as described above, in order to prevent the power interruption power from being supplied to the main RAM 85 and the power interruption power to the payout RAM 165 from the power-on power supply unit 173, Power is supplied to the VCC terminal and VBB terminal of the main MPU 83, and the power is supplied to the VCC terminal and VBB terminal of the payout MPU 163. Electric power is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 83 while not supplied to the VBB terminal of the payout MPU 163.

  The power-off power supply unit 174 has a relatively large capacity, and the information stored in the main RAM 85 before the power-off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). In this case, as described above, the power of the power interruption unit 174 is supplied to the main RAM 85, but not supplied to the payout RAM 165, so that the payout RAM 165 cannot be backed up. However, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the power supply unit 174 for power interruption, and to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 10.

  The power supply unit 174 for power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power to the power supply unit 174 for power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically. In addition, the power supply / launch control board 172 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing (not shown) different from the power supply unit 174 for power interruption. In the power supply / launch control board 172, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing discharges for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing described later. The output of 5 volts, which is the drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. Thereby, the main control board 82 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 based on the command received from the main control device 81 and transmits the command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 91 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the symbol display device 61. In the following description, the MPU 93, the ROM 94, and the RAM 95 of the sound emission control board 92 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 93, the sound light side ROM 94, and the sound light side RAM 95 for convenience of description.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 83>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 83 uses various counter information during the game to perform winning occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 62a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 61, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 63a, etc. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 61 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the general-purpose role 55a of the second operating port 55 is set to the open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 85a of the RAM 85.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 85b when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs.

  The special figure holding area 85b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 62a, and starting one game time At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 85c of the main RAM 85 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility 55a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 55 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball PA is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the power utility 55a of the second operation port 55 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the open call using the open call lottery using the normal call random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 55a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set to be longer. Yes. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric power utility is selected and the open state of the electric utility object 55a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display continuation time for the display unit 63a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 54 than in the second operating port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 54. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 55 increases.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 63a based on winning to the through gate 56) after the next public train opening lottery is performed and the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  When the public power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4 is won, the public power open state is entered. The public power open state is terminated when a predetermined number of times the power utility 55a is opened or closed, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the second operation port 55. To do. Specifically, the above upper limit number is 10 in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening / closing of the utility model 55a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the high-frequency support mode is more often than in the low-frequency support mode. There are three times. In addition, the duration of one opening of the utility model 55a is 1 sec in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 sec in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won in the determination of the success / failure is stored in the main ROM 84 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity prize winning device 53 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger for at least one of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means. In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values to be a big win is set larger than when the low-probability mode success / failure table is referenced. Specifically, there are 20 pieces. In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode.

  If the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the stored value of the big hit type counter C2.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the big hit is won is a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric prize device 53. That is. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 53 is relatively high during the period from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a single opening mode of the special prize winning device 53 is set in a plurality of types with different opening durations from when the special prize winning device 53 is opened until it is closed. Yes. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.05 sec, which is a shorter duration than the above long time, are set. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the game ball launch handle 37 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 45 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, an opening duration time is set that is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launching period of the game balls. ing. Therefore, when the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electricity prize winning device 53 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in the aspect, it is expected that no special electric prize winning device 53 is won.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electricity winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a long-time manner. That is, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a long-time manner. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode. That is, the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 53 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity winning device 53 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended, the value is not limited to the above value. It is.

  The types of jackpot result type for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main ROM 84 as a sorting table. In the distribution table, as the types of jackpot results, a low probability jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode before shifting to the open / close execution mode becomes any low probability mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the jackpot result is the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically 100 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the transition. The low-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the completion of the step will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The explicit high-accuracy big hit result is that the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode is changed, and the opening / closing execution is executed. It is a jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts, and the opening / closing execution mode It is a jackpot result that becomes the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the distribution table, out of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit high probability big hit result. , “15-29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 61. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 61 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the symbols in the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in that state. A display state for performing variable display is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire symbol display device 61 after the combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 61, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the probability that the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 84 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main MPU 83 but by the sound light MPU 93. In this case, in the sound side MPU 93, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are easier to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the missed result, and a notice display having a low appearance rate is generated. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easy to do. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 61.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 83 determines the display continuation time in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display continuation time in the symbol display device 61. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 62a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 61.

<About various processes executed by main MPU 83>
Next, various processes executed to advance the game in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main MPU 83 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in the pachinko machine 10 at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, main processing in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, a power-on wait process on the main side is executed. The details of the power-on wait process on the main side will be described later. For example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 85 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 83 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 171a provided in the power / fire control device 171 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 85. It is determined whether or not. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 171a is being pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 171a is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 85 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 85. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to

  In step S109, a payout side communication confirmation process is executed. Details of the communication confirmation processing will be described later. In subsequent step S110, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 85 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the sound emission control device 91 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To send to.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processes in steps S111 to S114. That is, the MPU 83 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S111 to S114 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S111 to S114 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S111, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S112, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S113. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 85, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S114, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a permitted state is performed. If the process of step S114 is performed, it will return to step S111 and will repeat the process of step S111-step S114.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main control board 82 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 83. A peripheral circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 83 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 83 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts timer interrupt processing with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 83, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 83, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 83 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed. In the power failure process, after various data settings are made so that the state before power shut-off can be restored at the next power-on, the system waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 83 is completely shut off.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S112, and in step S204, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S113. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Specifically, by making an affirmative determination in step S206, the processing for advancing the game in steps S207 to S219 is not executed. If the game progress is to be stopped, a command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 so that notification corresponding to the event that triggered the game progress is executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are started again when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 83, and the operating power to the main MPU 83 is When the supply of operating power is started while the RAM erase switch 171a of the power supply / launch control device 171 is pressed after the supply is stopped, the main RAM 85 is not executed as the initialization is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S207 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 53c and 55c is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 53 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 53c is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

  In addition, when the information for switching the general electric utility 55a of the second working port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 55c should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 52a, 53b, 54a, 55b, and 56a are read, and the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55 are read. And the process which specifies the presence or absence of the ball | bowl entering the through gate 56 is performed. The details of the winning detection process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 85 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of any one of magnetism, radio waves, and vibrations is confirmed using the detection results of the corresponding detection sensors. When it is confirmed that any of the fraud handling events has occurred, the game stop setting is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, and an affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In the subsequent step S212, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the launch operation is continued for the game ball launch handle 37, as already described, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In subsequent step S213, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 52a, 53b, 54a, 55b, 56a, gaming machine main body 12 and front door based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208. The opening of the frame 14 is confirmed.

  In the subsequent step S214, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S215, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary power transmission control process, when winning to the through gate 56 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. The numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, with the opening determination as a trigger, a process for performing an effect for a general map is executed in the general map display unit 63a. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the common utility 55a of the second working port 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S216, based on the processing results of immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 62a in the special figure hold display unit 62b, The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 63a to the general figure hold display unit 63b is set. In step S216, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 62a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the general map display unit 63a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In subsequent step S217, the content of the command received from the payout control device 161 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S218, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. The processing contents of the payout state reception process and the payout output process will be described in detail later.

  In a succeeding step S219, an out ball monitoring process is executed. A launch ball detection sensor is provided at a position adjacent to the most downstream part in the launch rail 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 45, and while the game ball passing on the launch rail 46 is being detected, the launch ball detection sensor A HI level launch detection signal is output to the main MPU 83, and a LOW level launch detection signal is output from the launch ball detection sensor to the main MPU 83 while no game ball is detected. In the out-ball monitoring process, the number of game balls that have passed on the launch rail 46 is measured based on the launch detection signal from the launch ball detection sensor, and each time the measured number of game balls reaches ten, The side MPU 83 externally outputs a signal indicating that ten game balls have been fired to the hall computer using an out ball external terminal 113e described later.

  Since the out sphere is measured using a counter provided in the main RAM 85, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 83 is stopped, the out sphere measurement result is stored and retained by the backup power. Is done. In addition, a foul ball detection sensor is provided for detecting a game ball that has passed over the launch rail 46 but has returned to the foul ball passage 72 without reaching the game area PA. When a game ball is detected, the measurement result of the out ball may be subtracted by 1.

  Further, as a sensor for detecting the launch of the out ball, instead of providing a launch ball detection sensor for detecting the game ball to be launched, the game ball discharged from the game area PA to the back side of the game board 51 is used. It is good also as a structure which provides the sensor to detect. In this case, a sensor for detecting a game ball discharged from the out port 58 is provided as the sensor, and the number of game balls detected by the sensor, the general winning port 52, the special prize winning device 53, the first operation. The sum of the number of game balls detected by the winning detection sensors of the mouth 54 and the second operation port 55 may be measured as the number of out balls. In place of this, a sensor for detecting a game ball discharged from the game area PA to the back side of the game board 51 and discharged from the pachinko machine 10 to the island facility of the game hall is provided, The number of game balls detected by the sensor may be measured as the number of out balls.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) of the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 is generated, a process for obtaining the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S301. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the first operating port 54 occurs or when the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 55 occurs, the special figure holding area 85b is reserved. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (specifically “4”). Stored in the uppermost area of the holding area RE where no holding information is stored.

  In the acquisition process, when hold information is obtained, a hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the hold command, and changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 61 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. When the number of the hold information increases as described above, the display control process in step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) displays so as to change to the display content corresponding to the increase in the hold number. Control is performed.

  In the subsequent step S302, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 85 is read out, and in the step S303, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 84 is read out. In step S304, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for game times, a special figure variation start process (step S306) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and an effect for game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set.

  Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 53 Special electric power opening process (step S310), special electric power closing apparatus processing (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 53, ending of the opening / closing execution mode and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 83 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special power counter is the special figure special electric power control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information stored at present is finished. Corresponding to the process executed in the process, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed. The special figure special electricity counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S310. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S311. If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S312. When any one of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the process of step S306-step S312 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not holding information is stored in the special figure holding area 85b. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the sound emission control device 91 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 84, it is acquired from the information stored in the execution area AE, ie, the information for the success / failure determination, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the obtained numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode determination table provided in the main ROM 84. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 84, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low likelihood jackpot result, the explicit high likelihood jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game round relating to the start of the current fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 84 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  The information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 85 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S405 is displayed. Set “1” to the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S408. Specifically, the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game round corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any one of steps S407 and S408, display continuation time acquisition processing is executed in step S409. In the acquisition process, the display at the current game time is determined according to the current gaming state, the result of the determination process, the result of the distribution determination process, the presence / absence of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter CS. Get the duration information.

  After the display continuation time acquisition process is executed in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and the display continuation time information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 13) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game times, the symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 61 are performed. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 61, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

  In subsequent step S411, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The change command has a data structure of 2 bytes. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and display duration time. And corresponding data. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a change command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. In addition, lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and time data corresponding to the display duration time is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sound side MPU 93 receives the change command, the sound side MPU 93 recognizes the change command from the identification data, and uses the lottery result data to determine the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. And the display duration of the current game time is recognized from the time data. Here, since the main MPU 83 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the information on whether or not reach occurs is included in the change command, the sound light MPU 93 displays it. It is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach from the duration information. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the type of the success / failure lottery mode. And data corresponding to the number of remaining continuations of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process and the following 4 bits of data are set. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is the data corresponding to the type of the lottery mode and the remaining number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode. Data is set. Therefore, when receiving the type command, the sound side MPU 93 recognizes the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. The type of success / failure lottery mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode are recognized from the data for continuation times.

  Here, both the change command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 collates the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, so that noise or the like is received with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. And when both the lottery result data match, the production control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both the lottery result data do not match Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound light side MPU 93 may execute an effect for game times corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game times. For example, in the effect for game times, the determination processing and the determination of distribution are performed. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 61 may reliably stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to complete detachment. In this case, the game turn effect may be configured to be performed over a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, or may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. Also good.

  After performing the process of step S411, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 62a is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S413 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process of step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 62a is determined. A process for changing regularly is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not reach display occurs.

  Also, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, this special figure is executed after executing the above regular change process. The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 61 for final stop display. The display mode of the picture on the display unit 62a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Further, information on the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game times is read from the main ROM 84 and set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electricity counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determining process in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special chart finalizing process, if the final stop time of the current game round has not elapsed, the special chart finalizing process is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed If the result of the determination of success / failure that triggered the current game is an out-of-game result, the special figure special counter is cleared to “0”, and then the processing for determining the special figure is terminated. If the result of the determination of success / failure is any jackpot result, processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the process for switching to the opening / closing execution mode, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is the timing for starting the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “3”. Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process of step S309 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special power start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 85 and the main RAM 85 Is set to 10 in the winning counter provided. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode by the main MPU 83, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode. The main MPU 83 specifies whether or not a winning has occurred. Then, an opening continuation time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the special electric prize winning device 53 is brought into an opened state. Further, when the special prize winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By receiving the opening command, the sound light side MPU 93 executes control for switching the effect in the opening / closing execution mode accordingly. After the special electricity winning device 53 is opened, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and the special electricity start process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” when the special electricity start process is executed, it becomes “4” after 1 is added.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric power release opening process of step S310 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not an end condition of one round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electric prize device 53 is closed and a close command is issued. Transmit to the optical MPU 93. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and is specifically 1 sec longer than the game ball firing cycle. When the special electricity prize winning device 53 is in the closed state, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the round counter is “0” or not. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity release process is executed is “4”, so “1” is added after 1 is added.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process in step S311 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened and the opening / closing execution mode of this time is executed. The opening duration corresponding to the hit result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Further, when the special prize winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity closing process is executed is “5”, so that “1” is obtained after 1 subtraction.

  On the other hand, when the round counter is “0”, an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is a timing for starting an effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result triggered by the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” when the special electricity closing process is executed, it becomes “6” after 1 is added.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process of step S312 in the special graphic special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed, the special electric power end process is ended as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, set the contents of the success / failure lottery mode and support mode after the opening / closing execution mode to the contents corresponding to the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode, Further, after the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”, the special electricity termination process is terminated.

<Winning detection process>
Next, the winning detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning detection process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not a winning to the first working port 54 has occurred. If a winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S502, and “1” is set to the first operating port winning flag provided in the main RAM 85. The first working port winning flag is a flag for specifying that a winning has occurred in the first working port 54. In step S503, 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the prize ball counter area 85d of the main RAM 85.

  Here, the prize ball counter area 85d is provided with one prize ball counter, ten prize ball counters, and 15 prize ball counters in addition to the three prize ball counters. . As already described, the present pachinko machine 10 is provided with the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55 as the winning portion for the winning ball. Then, when a prize is awarded to the general prize opening 52, ten prize balls are generated, and when a prize is awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 53, 15 prize balls are generated. When a winning to 54 is generated, three winning balls are generated, and when a winning to the second operation port 55 is generated, one winning ball is generated. In this case, the counter for 15 prize balls stores data indicating how many times 15 prize balls are awarded for winning the special electric prize winning device 53. The 10-award ball counter stores data indicating how many times 10-award balls are awarded for winning in the general winning opening 52. The three award ball counter stores data indicating how many times the three award balls for the winning to the first working port 54 are performed. The single winning ball counter stores data indicating how many times a single winning ball for the winning in the second operation port 55 is to be performed.

  Each prize ball counter is composed of 1 byte. Therefore, each prize ball counter can acquire 256 numerical information, and can memorize a maximum of 255 prize balls each.

  If a negative determination is made in step S501, or if the process of step S503 is executed, it is determined in step S504 whether or not a winning to the second working port 55 has occurred. If a winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where “1” is set to the second working port winning flag provided in the main RAM 85. The second working port winning flag is a flag for specifying that a winning for the second working port 55 has occurred. In step S506, one prize ball counter in the prize ball counter area 85d is incremented by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S504, or if the process of step S506 is executed, it is determined in step S507 whether or not a prize for the special prize winning device 53 has occurred. If a winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S508, and “1” is set to a special electricity winning flag provided in the main RAM 85. The special electricity prize winning flag is a flag for specifying that the prize winning to the special electricity prize winning device 53 has occurred. In step S509, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters in the prize ball counter area 85d.

  If a negative determination is made in step S507, or if the process of step S509 is executed, it is determined in step S510 whether or not a winning to the through gate 56 has occurred. If a winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S 511, where “1” is set to the through flag provided in the main RAM 85. The through flag is a flag for specifying that the game ball has passed through the through gate 56.

  If a negative determination is made in step S510, or if the process of step S511 has been executed, it is determined in step S512 whether or not a winning to the general winning opening 52 has occurred. If a winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S513, and 1 is added to the 10 winning ball counters in the winning ball counter area 85d.

<About payout output processing>
Next, the payout output process executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not any prize ball counter value in the prize ball counter area 85d is 1 or more. When the value of any prize ball counter is “0”, the payout output process is terminated as it is, while when the value of any prize ball counter is 1 or more, in step S602. Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball permission signal transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 is at the HI level indicating a state in which the output of the prize ball command is permitted.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as already described, the power from the power interruption unit 174 of the power supply / launch control board 172 is supplied to the main RAM 85, but not supplied to the payout RAM 165. . With this configuration, as already described, the capacity of the power supply unit 174 for power interruption can be reduced, and accordingly, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  However, in this configuration, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the payout side RAM 165 is erased (destroyed). In this case, if all the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout-side RAM 165 as in the conventional pachinko machine, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 can be performed in a situation where there are unpaid prize balls. When stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are erased without being paid out. If it does so, it will cause a great disadvantage to a player.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the prize ball counter area 85d of the main RAM 85, and the main MPU 83 receives an HI level prize ball permission signal from the payout MPU 163. , A prize ball command is output to the payout side MPU 163. Thereby, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls to be erased as much as possible. That is, the prize ball permission signal is information output from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83 in order to specify the output timing of the prize ball command in the main MPU 83.

  Returning to the description of the payout output process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S602 that the winning ball permission signal is at the LOW level, the payout output process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the prize ball permission signal is at the HI level, the payout command output process is executed in step S603, and then the payout output process is terminated.

  In the prize ball command output process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of one prize ball counter area in the prize ball counter area 85d of the main RAM 85 is "0". A ball command is transmitted to the payout side MPU 163, and the value of one prize ball counter area is decremented by one. Thereafter, it is determined again whether or not the value of the single prize ball counter area is “0”. If the value is 1 or more, a single prize ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 163 again. The transmission of the single prize ball command is repeated until the value of the single prize ball counter area becomes “0”. When the value of the counter area for 1 prize ball is “0”, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter area for 15 prize balls is “0”. Is sent to the payout MPU 163 and 1 is subtracted from the value of the 15 prize ball counter areas. When the value of the counter area for 15 prize balls is “0”, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter area for 10 prize balls in the prize ball counter area 85d is “0”. Is sent to the payout-side MPU 163 and the value of the counter area for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter area is “0”, a 3 prize ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 163 and the value of the 3 prize ball counter area is decremented by 1.

<Various types of processing executed by the payout side MPU 163>
Next, various processes executed for paying out the game ball in the payout side MPU 163 will be described. The processing of the payout side MPU 163 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in the pachinko machine 10 at a cycle of 2 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process in the payout side MPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S701, a power-on wait process on the payout side is executed. The details of the power-on wait process on the payout side will be described later. For example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 2 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In subsequent step S702, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted in step S703. Then, the process in step S703 is repeatedly executed until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the payout MPU 163>
Next, timer interrupt processing executed for paying out the game ball at the payout side MPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed by interrupting the main process activated when the power is turned on at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, in step S801, a full tank process for monitoring whether or not the lower plate 34 is full is executed, and in a subsequent step S802, a ball for monitoring whether or not the tank 121 is in a no-ball state. Perform unnecessary processing.

  In subsequent step S803, a payout abnormality monitoring process for monitoring whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred in the payout device 124 is executed. In the payout abnormality monitoring process, when the payout motor 137 is driven and the game ball is not detected by the payout ball detection sensor 138 for a predetermined period, a retry operation is performed as a detection abnormal state. Make it. Specifically, when a game ball is not detected by the payout ball detection sensor 138 in spite of outputting a drive signal for advancing the payout motor 137 by 120 steps, a retry operation is performed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 138 by a retry operation, the processing after step S804 is executed as it is. On the other hand, if a game ball is not detected by the payout ball detection sensor 138 even if the retry operation is performed, a payout abnormality state is set, a payout abnormality command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and a payout abnormality notification setting is made. Execute. The payout abnormality command has a 1-byte data structure, and when the main MPU 83 receives the payout abnormality command, the payout abnormality command is added with the upper 1 byte data indicating that it is a notification-type command. The command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereby, the display light emission part 23, the speaker part 26, and the symbol display apparatus 61 perform notification indicating that the payout is abnormal. In the payout abnormality notification setting, the display content on the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the payout abnormality. The notification of the payout abnormality is canceled when the state return switch 161b of the payout control board 162 is operated for 20 msec and a game ball is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 138 thereafter.

  After executing the process of step S803, the main body frame opening monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the main body frame 13 is in the open state is executed in step S804, and the front door frame 14 is opened in step S805. A front door frame opening monitoring process for monitoring whether or not it is in a state is executed.

  Thereafter, command read processing is executed in step S806. In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main MPU 83 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in a prize ball command storage area 165 a provided in the payout side RAM 165.

  In the subsequent step S807, a prize ball setting process for setting data necessary for executing the payout of the number of game balls corresponding to the received prize ball command is executed. In the subsequent step S808, the game ball through the payout device 124 is executed. This timer interrupt is executed after executing the payout control process for performing the payout execution control and further executing the prize ball permission signal setting process for setting the output of the prize ball permission signal to the main MPU 83 in step S809. The process ends.

  Hereinafter, the processing contents of steps S801 to S805 and steps S807 to S809 will be described in detail.

<Full tank processing>
The full tank process in step S801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the full tank process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not an HI level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147. If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the value of the second full counter provided in the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” in step S902. The second full tank counter is a counter for measuring a period during which the full tank detection signal at the LOW level is continuously received from the full tank detection sensor 147.

  In subsequent step S903, the value of the first full counter provided in the payout side RAM 165 is incremented by one. The first full tank counter is a counter for measuring a period during which the HI level full tank detection signal is continuously received from the full tank detection sensor 147.

  In a succeeding step S904, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in a post-power-on flag provided in the payout-side RAM 147. The post-power-on flag indicates whether or not the payout side MPU 163 is in a state after it is confirmed that the full tank detection sensor 147 is at the LOW level after the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started. It is a flag to specify.

  If “1” is not set in the post-power-on flag, it is determined in step S905 whether or not the value of the first full counter in the payout side RAM 165 is “125”. When the HI level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147, the value of the first full tank counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec. Therefore, in step S905, the HI level full tank detection signal is added. It is determined whether or not the data has been continuously received for about 250 msec.

  If the determination in step S905 is affirmative, in step S906, the full tank low speed flag provided in the payout side RAM 165 is set to “1”, and then the full tank processing is terminated. The driving state of the payout motor 137 in the payout side MPU 163 includes a normal state and a low speed state. In the normal state, the payout speed of the payout motor 137 is set to the normal speed. In this case, one game ball is paid out at intervals of 60 msec. On the other hand, the low speed state is a state in which the payout speed of the payout motor 137 is set to a low speed. In this case, one game ball is paid out at intervals of 800 msec. The full tank low speed flag is a flag for specifying in the payout side MPU 163 that the driving state of the payout motor 137 is set to the low speed state in a situation where the lower tray 34 may be full. It is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the value of the first full counter in the payout side RAM 165 is “250”. As described above, the value of the first full tank counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec when the full tank detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 147 is received. It is determined whether the tongue detection signal is continuously received for about 500 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S907, the full tank processing is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S907, the process proceeds to step S908. In step S908, the full tank flag provided in the payout side RAM 165 is set to “1”, a full tank state command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and a full tank abnormality notification setting is executed. The processing for the tongue ends. The full tank flag is a flag for the payout-side MPU 163 to specify that the lower tray 34 is in a full tank state and the game ball payout is stopped. The full tank state command is a command for instructing that the lower tray 34 should be informed that it is full. In the full tank abnormality notification setting, the display content on the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the full tank abnormality.

  If the power-on flag is set to “1” and an affirmative determination is made in step S904, whether or not the value of the first full counter in the payout side RAM 165 is “4” in step S909. Determine whether. As described above, the value of the first full counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec when an HI level full sensor signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147. Therefore, in step S909, the HI level full level counter is incremented. It is determined whether the tongue detection signal is continuously received for about 8 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S909, the full tank processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, “1” is set to the full tank flag of the payout side RAM 165, a full tank state command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and a full tank abnormality notification is made. After executing the setting, the full tank processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S901, the post-power-on flag of the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” in step S911. In step S912, the first full counter of the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0”, and in step S913, the full tank low speed flag of the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0”.

  In the subsequent step S914, 1 is added to the value of the second full counter in the payout side RAM 165. Thereafter, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the value of the second full counter after adding 1 is “1000”. The value of the second full tank counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec when a low level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147. Therefore, in step S906, a low level full tank detection signal is output. It is determined whether or not the data is continuously received for about 2000 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, the full tank processing is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S915, the full tank flag in the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” in step S916. Then, a full tank release command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and after the full tank abnormality notification is canceled, the full tank processing is terminated. The full tank release command is a command for releasing the state in which the lower plate 34 is informed that it is full. In canceling the full tank abnormality notification, the display content corresponding to the full tank abnormality in the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is canceled and changed to the initial state content.

<Operation when the lower plate 34 is full>
Next, an operation state when the lower plate 34 is in a full state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21A shows a period in which the payout side MPU 163 is in an activated state, FIG. 21B shows a detection period of the full tank detection sensor 147, FIG. 21C shows a driving state of the payout motor 137, FIG. 21 (d) shows a set period in a full state.

  First, a case where the normal state is not immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, at the timing t1 when the payout side MPU 163 is in an activated state, the output of the HI level full tank detection signal is started from the full tank detection sensor 147. After that, at the timing t2, which is the situation where the output of the HI level full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 147 is continued, the continuation period T1 that triggers the setting to the full tank low speed state elapses. As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the driving state of the dispensing motor 137 is switched from the normal state to the low speed state.

  As described above, even if the period during which the HI level full tank detection signal is continuously received from the full tank detection sensor 147 is not a period corresponding to the setting to the full tank state, the low speed state can be set. The reason why the dispensing motor 137 is set to the low speed state when the corresponding period is reached is as follows. That is, the full tank detection sensor 147 is configured to continuously output the HI level full tank detection signal while the game ball is being detected. Therefore, if the interval between game balls that are continuously paid out becomes narrow, When viewed from the detection sensor 147, the end of the detection period of one game ball is later than the start of the detection period of the next game ball. Then, although the lower plate 34 is not in a full state, a full tank detection signal of HI level is continuously output from the full tank detection sensor 147. And if this state continues, it will be specified that the lower pan 34 is a full tank state. On the other hand, as described above, by switching the payout motor 137 to the low speed state, the interval between the game balls discharged toward the lower plate 34 is widened. More specifically, this interval exceeds the detection range of the full tank detection sensor 147. Therefore, since the output of the full tank detection signal that has been continued is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the lower tray 34 from being identified as being full even though it is not full.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 21B, the output level of the full tank detection signal output from the full tank detection sensor 147 is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21C, the driving state of the dispensing motor 137 is returned from the low speed state to the normal state.

  In other words, when the output of the HI level full tank detection signal is interrupted by changing the payout motor 137 to the low speed state in a state where the HI level full tank detection signal is continuously output from the full tank detection sensor 147. In this case, the driving state of the dispensing motor 137 is immediately returned to the normal state. Thus, in the configuration in which the payout speed of the payout motor 137 is changed to a low speed as necessary, the time required for paying out the game ball is prevented from becoming extremely long.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 21B, the output of the HI level full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 147 is resumed. Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the HI level full-tank detection signal is continuously output from the full-tank detection sensor 147, the continuation period T1 that triggers the setting to the full-tan low speed state elapses. As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the driving state of the dispensing motor 137 is switched from the normal state to the low speed state.

  In addition, at the timing of t6, which is the situation where the output of the HI level full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 147 is continued, the continuation period T2 that becomes the trigger for setting the full tank state elapses, and FIG. As shown in d), the full tank state is set, and the drive of the dispensing motor 137 is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 21B, the output level of the full tank detection signal output from the full tank detection sensor 147 is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Then, when the output state at the LOW level is continued and the release continuation period T3 elapses at the timing t8, the full tank state is released as shown in FIG. 21 (d), and as shown in FIG. 21 (c). The driving state of the payout motor 137 is returned from the stopped state to the normal state.

  Next, a case where the supply of operating power to the payout-side MPU 163 has just been started will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the payout-side MPU 163 is activated at the timing t9. Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 21B, the output of the HI level full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 147 is started. After that, at the timing t10 when the output of the HI level full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 147 is continued, a continuation period T4 (T4 <T1) immediately after the power is turned on becomes a trigger for setting the full tank state. When <T2) has elapsed, the full tank state is set as shown in FIG. 21 (d), and the drive of the dispensing motor 137 is stopped as shown in FIG. 21 (c).

  Immediately after the supply of the operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started as described above, the duration of the HI level full detection signal required to determine that the lower plate 34 is in the full state is the operating power. Compared to a normal state that is not immediately after the supply is started, the time is shortened. More specifically, since the duration is 8 msec as described above, the duration is shorter than 60 msec, which is the payout period of the game ball when the driving state of the payout motor 137 is set to the normal state. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started in a state where the lower tray 34 is full, the number of game balls to be paid out until the drive of the payout motor 137 is stopped is maximum. It becomes one. In this pachinko machine 10, since the full tank detection sensor 147 is provided in the game ball distribution unit 125 of the back pack unit 15, the detection range of the full tank detection sensor 147 exists at a position close to the payout device 124. Yes. In this case, as described above, when the supply of the operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started in a situation where the lower plate 34 is full, the payout device is stopped by stopping the payout of the game ball at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that game balls continue to the position 124. On the other hand, in a normal state that is not immediately after the supply of operating power is started, a long period of time is required to determine that the lower plate 34 is full, so that the lower plate 34 is in a full state. It is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of an event that the payout of the game ball is stopped despite the absence.

  Thereafter, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 21B, the output level of the full tank detection signal output from the full tank detection sensor 147 is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Then, when the output state at the LOW level is continued and the release continuation period T3 elapses at the timing of t12, the full tank state is released as shown in FIG. 21D, and as shown in FIG. The driving state of the payout motor 137 is returned from the stopped state to the normal state.

<Useless ball>
Next, the ball useless process in step S802 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the sphere non-use process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a HI-level sphere non-detection signal is received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value of the second ballless counter provided in the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” in step S1002. The second sphere-less counter is a counter for measuring a period during which a LOW-level sphere non-detection signal is continuously received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a.

  In subsequent step S1003, 1 is added to the value of the first ballless counter provided in the payout-side RAM 147. The first sphere-less counter is a counter for measuring a period during which a HI-level sphere non-detection signal is continuously received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a.

  In a succeeding step S1004, it is determined whether or not the value of the first ballless counter in the payout side RAM 165 is “500”. The value of the first sphere non-counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec when a HI level sphere non-detection signal is received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a. It is determined whether or not it has been continuously received for about 1000 msec.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, in step S1005, “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag provided in the payout side RAM 165, and then the ball useless processing is terminated. The ball-less low-speed flag is a flag for the dispensing-side MPU 163 to specify that the driving state of the dispensing motor 137 is set to a low-speed state in a situation where the tank 121 may be in a ball-free state. is there.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the value of the first ballless counter in the payout-side RAM 165 is “5000”. As described above, the value of the first sphere non-counter is incremented by 1 at a cycle of 2 msec when a HI level sphere non-detection signal is received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a. It is determined whether or not the sphere non-detection signal is continuously received for about 10,000 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1006, the main ball useless process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, “1” is set to the ball no flag provided in the payout side RAM 165, a ball no state command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and the ball no abnormality notification setting is executed. End the ball useless process. The no-ball flag is a flag for the payout-side MPU 163 to specify that the tank 121 is in a no-ball state and the game ball is not paid out. The ballless state command is a command for instructing that the tank 121 should be informed that the ball 121 is in a state of no balls. In the notification setting for the absence of a sphere, the display content on the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the absence of a sphere.

  As described above, when the output of the HI level ball non-detection signal is continued for about 1 sec, the driving state of the payout motor 137 is switched to the low speed state, and the output state of the signal is continued for about 10 sec. In this case, the driving of the dispensing motor 137 is stopped for the following reason. That is, the tank 121 is provided with a vibration motor for vibrating the tank 121 in order to eliminate the ball clogging when the ball clogging occurs. If the ball clogging is not severe, the ball clogging is eliminated by vibrating the tank 121 with a vibration motor. And it is considered that the elimination of the ball clogging is completed within 9 seconds.

  In this circumstance, when the period when the game ball is not detected by the ball non-detection sensor 123a passes about 1.0 sec, which is the first ball non-specific reference period, the payout speed of the payout motor 137 is switched to the low speed cycle. Thus, the possibility that the ball clogging is eliminated at the timing before all the game balls waiting on the upstream side of the payout device 124 are eliminated is increased. When all of the game balls waiting on the upstream side of the payout device 124 are exhausted, when the game balls are replenished from the tank 121 side toward the payout device 124, the game balls pass through the case rail 123. It falls and directly collides with the rotating body 136 of the dispensing device 124, and there is a concern that the rotating body 136 may fail. On the other hand, by switching to the low speed state as described above, the possibility of such inconvenience occurring is reduced.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, the first ballless counter of the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” in step S1008, and the ball no low speed flag of the payout side RAM165 is set to “ Clear “0”.

  That is, when the output of the HI level ball non-detection signal is interrupted in the situation where the HI level ball non-detection signal is continuously output from the ball non-detection sensor 123a, the driving state of the payout motor 137 is immediately Is returned to the normal state. Thus, in the configuration in which the payout speed of the payout motor 137 is changed to a low speed as necessary, the time required for paying out the game ball is prevented from becoming extremely long.

  In the subsequent step S1010, 1 is added to the value of the second ballless counter in the payout side RAM 165. Thereafter, in step S1011, it is determined whether or not the value of the second ball-less counter after adding 1 is “1500”. The value of the second sphere non-counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec when a LOW level sphere non-detection signal is received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a. It is determined whether or not it has been continuously received for about 3000 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1011, the ball useless processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1011, the ball-free flag in the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" in step S1012. Then, the ball no-release command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and after the ball no-abnormality notification is canceled, the main ball useless processing is terminated. The no ball release command is a command for releasing a state in which it is reported that the tank 121 is in a no ball state. In canceling the notification of the absence of a sphere, the display content corresponding to the absence of a sphere in the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is canceled and changed to the initial state.

<Open monitoring of main body frame 13 and front door frame 14 in payout side MPU 163>
Next, a configuration for monitoring the opening of the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 in the payout side MPU 163 will be described.

  Prior to the description of the processing configuration for opening monitoring in the payout side MPU 163, the configuration for external output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 23B is an external terminal plate 113 provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. In the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed to correspond to each pachinko machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and includes a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of game times executed, and a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times of execution of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode. 2 display part DC2 is provided. In addition, in the second display unit DC2, the number of times of the opening / closing execution mode that occurs in a situation where at least one of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continues can be displayed in a predetermined manner, for example, blinking display. By performing such a display, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of extended games in the opening / closing execution mode in a situation where at least one of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is continued.

  A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and an MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed are temporarily stored. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing the data.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through an electric path EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electric path EL2. And while performing the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10, the signal according to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, the external terminal plate 113 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 113a to 113h. A total of eight external terminals 113a to 113h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC are different.

  Specifically, the jackpot external terminal 113a used for outputting information indicating that the open / close execution mode is based on the fact that the main MPU 83 has won the jackpot is selected, and the support mode is frequently used. An external terminal 113b for support mode used for outputting information indicating that the game is in the support mode, and an external terminal 113c for game frequency used for outputting information indicating that one game has been completed. And a fraud notification external terminal 113d used for outputting information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected, and information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been discharged from the game area PA. Used to output the out-ball external terminal 113e and information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out. The external terminal 113f for the number of payouts, the external terminal 113g for opening the main body used for outputting information indicating that the main body frame 13 is open, and the front door frame 14 being open. And an external terminal 113h for opening the front door used for outputting information.

  The main side MPU 83 uses a part of the electric wiring included in the electric path EL3, the jackpot external terminal 113a, the support mode external terminal 113b, the game number external terminal 113c, and the fraud notification The external terminals 113d and the out-ball external terminals 113e are electrically connected in a one-to-one correspondence, and signals of a predetermined voltage are output to the external terminals 113a to 113e according to the processing results. To do. The payout side MPU 163 is electrically connected to the payout number external terminal 113f using a part of the electric wiring included in the electric path EL3, and outputs a signal of a predetermined voltage to the external terminal 113f according to the processing result. Output.

  On the other hand, signal output through the external terminal 113g for opening the main body and the external terminal 113h for opening the front door is executed without being controlled by the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163. A configuration for performing the signal output will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As already described, the front door frame opening sensor 42 is provided for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and for detecting whether or not the main body frame 13 is in the open state. A body frame opening sensor 114 is provided. The detection results of the front door frame opening sensor 42 and the main body frame opening sensor 114 are input not to the main MPU 83 but to the payout MPU 163.

  The payout-side MPU 163 determines whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state based on an electrical signal received from the front door frame open sensor 42. If the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the payout motor 137 is driven. To stop paying out game balls. When the front door frame 14 is opened, a command corresponding to the main MPU 83 is transmitted, and the main MPU 83 transmits a command corresponding to the received command to the sound light MPU 93. Based on the reception of the command, the sound light side MPU 93 uses the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61 to perform notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Similarly, the payout-side MPU 163 determines whether or not the main body frame 13 is in an open state based on an electrical signal received from the main body frame open sensor 114. If the main body frame 13 is in an open state, the payout motor 137 is driven. To stop paying out game balls. When the main body frame 13 is opened, a command corresponding to the main MPU 83 is transmitted, and the main MPU 83 transmits a command corresponding to the received command to the sound light MPU 93. Based on the reception of the command, the sound light side MPU 93 uses the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61 to perform notification indicating that the main body frame 13 is being opened.

  As described above, the detection results of the front door frame opening sensor 42 and the main body frame opening sensor 114 are output to the payout side MPU 163, and the payout side MPU 163 performs the opening monitoring of the front door frame 14 and the opening monitoring of the main body frame 13. In this configuration, the external terminal 113h for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 113 is electrically connected to the front door frame opening sensor 42, and the external terminal 113h for opening the main body is electrically connected to the main body frame opening sensor 114. It is connected.

  Specifically, a signal relay board 185 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door frame opening sensor 42 to the payout side MPU 163. The signal relay board 185 is provided with a branch path SL2 that branches from the signal path SL1 from the front door frame opening sensor 42 toward the payout side MPU 163. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal 113h for opening the front door. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result in the front door frame opening sensor 42 is input not only to the payout side MPU 163 but also to the external terminal 113 h for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 113. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side MPU 163.

  In detail, the signal relay board 185 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body frame open sensor 114 to the payout side MPU 163. The branch path SL4 is connected to the external terminal 113g for opening the main body. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body frame opening sensor 114 is not only input to the payout side MPU 163 but also input to the external terminal 113g for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 113. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the main body frame 13 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side MPU 163.

<Mainframe open signal monitoring process>
Next, the body frame opening monitoring process in step S804 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the main body frame opening signal monitoring process is (1) a process when the main body frame 13 is specified to be in the closed state and the closed state is continued, and (2) the main body frame 13 is Processing until the open state is specified from the closed state until the open state is specified. (3) After the main body frame 13 is specified to be open, the open state continues. (4) The process when the main body frame 13 changes from the open state to the closed state until it is specified that it is in the closed state. Therefore, the processing of these situations will be described individually.

  First, the processing when the main body frame 13 of the above (1) is specified to be in the closed state and the closed state is continued will be described.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the body frame opening signal from the body frame opening sensor 114 is at the HI level. Since this time is a case where the main body frame 13 is in a closed state, a negative determination is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, “4” that is the opening specific reference number is set in the first main body frame counter provided in the payout side RAM 165. The first main body frame counter is a counter that is used to specify that the main body frame 13 is opened in the payout side MPU 163 when the closed main frame 13 is opened.

  In a succeeding step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the second main body frame counter provided in the payout side RAM 165 is “0”. The second main body frame counter is a counter that is used to specify that the main body frame 13 is in the closed state in the payout side MPU 163 when the main body frame 13 in the open state is in the closed state. The value of the second main body frame counter is maintained in the state of “0” after specifying that the main body frame 13 is in the closed state. Therefore, if the main body frame 13 is continued in the closed state, the second main body frame counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, and the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is. .

  Next, the process until the main frame 13 in the above (2) is changed from the closed state to the open state until it is specified to be in the open state will be described.

  Since this time is a case where the main body frame 13 is in an open state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, “500” which is the closing specific reference number is set in the second main body frame counter of the payout side RAM 165.

  In a succeeding step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the first main body frame counter is “0”. This time, since the process is performed until the main body frame 13 changes from the closed state to the open state and is determined to be in the open state, the first time in step S1102 when the main body frame 13 is in the closed state. The value set in the main body frame counter is not yet “0”. Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S1110, and the process proceeds to step S1111.

  In step S1111, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first body frame counter. In a succeeding step S1112, it is determined whether or not the value of the first main body frame counter is “0”. That is, the value of the first main body frame counter is incremented every time the main body frame open signal monitoring process is executed until the main body frame 13 is changed from the closed state to the open state and is determined to be in the open state. 1 is subtracted. Further, since the main frame open signal monitoring process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), its execution cycle is about 2 msec. If the main body frame 13 is in the closed state, “4” is set to the first main body frame counter in step S1102. Therefore, in step S1112, it is determined whether or not 8 msec has elapsed since the main body frame 13 was opened and changed from the closed state to the open state.

  If the value of the first main body frame counter is not “0”, a negative determination is made in step S1112 and the main body frame open signal monitoring process is terminated as it is. When the value of the first body frame counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1112 and the process proceeds to step S1113. In step S 1113, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the main body frame release flag provided in the payout side RAM 165. The main body frame opening flag is a flag for specifying in the payout side MPU 163 that the main body MPU 83 has not been transmitted after the main body frame opening command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. is there. If “1” is set, the monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if “1” is not set, the process proceeds to step S1114.

  In step S <b> 1114, “1” is set in the main body frame release flag of the payout side RAM 165. Thereafter, in step S1115, a main body frame opening command indicating that the main body frame 13 has been opened is transmitted to the main MPU 83 and the main body frame opening notification setting is executed, and then the monitoring process ends. In the notification setting of the main body frame opening, the display content in the state display portion 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the opening of the main body frame 13.

  Next, a process when the main body frame 13 in (3) above is specified to be in an open state and the open state is continued will be described.

  Since this time is the case where the main body frame 13 is in the open state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1109, where “500” is set in the second main body frame counter of the payout side RAM 165. In a succeeding step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the first main body frame counter is “0”. Since this time is a case where the open state of the main body frame 13 is continued, the state where the value of the first main body frame counter is “0” is maintained. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S1110, and this monitoring process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the process until the main frame 13 in the above (4) is changed from the open state to the closed state until it is specified to be in the closed state will be described.

  Since this time is the case where the main body frame 13 is in the closed state, a negative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102, and “4” is set in the first main body frame counter of the payout side RAM 165. In a succeeding step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the second main body frame counter of the payout side RAM 165 is “0”. In this example, since the process is performed when the main body frame 13 is changed from the open state to the closed state until the closed state is specified, the second main body frame counter is determined in step S1109 when the main body frame 13 is in the open state. In this state, the value set in is not yet “0”. Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S1103, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second main body frame counter. In a succeeding step S1105, it is determined whether or not the value of the second main body frame counter is “0”. That is, the value of the second body frame counter is incremented every time the body frame opening signal monitoring process is executed until the body frame 13 is changed from the open state to the closed state until it is specified that the body frame 13 is in the closed state. 1 is subtracted. Further, since the main frame open signal monitoring process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), its execution cycle is about 2 msec. If the main body frame 13 is in the open state, “500” is set to the second main body frame counter in step S1109. Therefore, in step S1105, it is determined whether or not 1000 msec has elapsed since the main body frame 13 was closed and changed from the open state to the closed state.

  If the value of the second body frame counter is not “0”, a negative determination is made in step S1105, and the monitoring process is terminated as it is. When the value of the second main body frame counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, and the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S 1106, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the main body frame release flag of the payout side RAM 165. If “1” is not set, the monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if “1” is set, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, the body frame release flag is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S1108, a main body frame closing command indicating that the main body frame 13 has been closed is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and after releasing the notification of the main body frame opening, the monitoring process is terminated. In releasing the notification of the main body frame release, the display content corresponding to the opening of the main body frame 13 in the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is canceled and changed to the content of the initial state.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), in the front door frame opening signal monitoring process in step S805, description of specific processing contents for specifying the open state and the closed state of the front door frame 14 is omitted. Basically, the same processing as the front door frame opening signal monitoring processing is executed. In the front door frame opening signal monitoring process, when it is specified that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, the front door frame opening flag provided in the payout side RAM 165 is set to “1”, When it is specified that the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the front door frame open flag is cleared to “0”. Further, when it is specified that the front door frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state, a front door frame open command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and it is specified that the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. In this case, a front door frame closing command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. Further, when it is specified that the front door frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the display content on the state display portion 161a of the dispensing control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the front door frame opening, and the front door frame 14 is opened. When it is determined that the closed state is entered from the state, the display content corresponding to the opening of the front door frame 14 in the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is canceled and changed to the initial state content.

  Here, processing contents executed by the main MPU 83 when any of the main body frame opening command, the main body frame closing command, the front door frame opening command, and the front door frame closing command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 will be described. . Processing corresponding to these commands is executed in the payout state reception processing in step S217 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 83.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the payout state reception process. When the main MPU 83 receives a main frame opening command from the payout MPU 163 (step S1207: YES), the main MPU 83 executes an upper byte addition process in step S1208. In the pachinko machine 10, the command transmitted from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83 has a 1-byte configuration, whereas the command transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound light MPU 93 has a 2-byte configuration. Therefore, in step S1208, 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to 1-byte data of the main body frame release command received this time. In step S1209, a 2-frame data body frame release command after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the main body frame opening command, it controls the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61 to start notification indicating that the main body frame 13 is in the open state.

  When the main MPU 83 receives the main body frame close command from the payout MPU 163 (step S1210: YES), the main MPU 83 executes an upper byte addition process in step S1211. In the addition process, 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to 1-byte data of the main body frame closing command received this time. In step S1212, a 2-byte data main body frame closing command after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When receiving the main body frame closing command, the sound light side MPU 93 terminates the notification indicating that the main body frame 13 is in the open state in the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61.

  When the main MPU 83 receives a front door frame opening command from the payout MPU 163 (step S1213: YES), the main MPU 83 sets “1” to the front door frame opening flag provided in the main RAM 85 in step S1214. The front door frame opening flag is a flag for the main side MPU 83 to specify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The main side MPU 83 sets “1” to the front door frame opening flag. In such a situation, the game ball launching mechanism 45 is prohibited from launching the game ball. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the game area PA is opened forward, but it is possible to prevent a game ball from being launched toward the game area PA under such circumstances. Is possible. In the subsequent step S1215, an upper byte addition process is executed. In the addition process, 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to 1-byte data of the front door frame opening command received this time. In step S1216, the front door frame opening command of the 2-byte data after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the front door frame opening command, it controls the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61 to start notifying that the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  When the main side MPU 83 receives the front door frame closing command from the payout side MPU 163 (step S1217: YES), the main side MPU 83 clears the front door frame open flag in the main side RAM 85 at step S1218. Thereby, the state in which the launching of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 45 is prohibited is released. In a succeeding step S1219, an upper byte addition process is executed. In the addition process, 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to 1-byte data of the front door frame closing command received this time. In step S1220, the front door frame closing command of 2-byte data after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When receiving the front door frame closing command, the sound light side MPU 93 terminates the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is open in the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61.

  As described above, whether or not the main body frame 13 is in the open state and whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state are executed by the payout side MPU 163, and the main frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are monitored. When one of them is in an open state, a command corresponding to that is transmitted to the main MPU 83. The main MPU 83 adds 1-byte data common to the received command to the received command, and the 2-byte command after the addition is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93, and the sound light side Opening notification is executed under the control of the MPU 93. In this case, as the process for executing the notification, the main side MPU 83 only needs to execute the process of adding common 1-byte data, so that the payout side MPU 163 monitors the open state. In the above-described configuration, it is possible to perform open notification while reducing the processing load on the main MPU 83.

<Prize ball setting process>
Next, the winning ball setting process in step S807 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is stored in the prize ball command storage area 165a of the payout side RAM 165 based on the result of the command reading process in step S806 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). If there is no prize ball command, the present prize ball setting process is terminated as it is. If a prize ball command is stored, the first prize ball among the stored prize ball commands is stored in step S1302. Know the command. Thereafter, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the recognized prize ball command is a single prize ball command.

  If it is a single prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S1304, and 1 is added to the value of the prize ball number counter 165b provided in the payout side RAM 165. The award ball number counter 165b is a counter indicating the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 124. In step S1304, in addition to updating the prize ball number counter 165b, a process for erasing the prize ball command as a prize ball setting target is executed.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1305, where it is determined whether there is an unset prize ball command. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command still exists in the prize ball command storage area 165a. If there is no prize ball command, the prize ball setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S1306 to grasp the next prize ball command. Then, the process returns to step S1303.

  If the recognized prize ball command is not a single prize ball command, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the recognized prize ball command is 15 prize ball commands. If the recognized prize ball command is not 15 prize ball commands, the process proceeds to step S1311. On the other hand, if it is 15 prize ball commands, the process proceeds to step S1308, the value of the prize ball number counter 165b is incremented by 15, and the prize ball command which is the prize ball setting target is deleted.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1309, and it is determined whether or not there is an unset prize ball command. If there is no prize ball command, the prize ball setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S1310, the next prize ball command is grasped, and the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the recognized prize ball command is 10 prize ball commands. If it is not a ten prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S1315. On the other hand, in the case of 10 prize ball commands, the process proceeds to step S1312, where the prize ball number counter 165b is decremented by 10, and the prize ball command which is the prize ball setting target is deleted.

  Thereafter, in step S1313, it is determined whether there is an unset prize ball command. If there is no prize ball command, the prize ball setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball command, in step S1314, the next prize ball command is grasped and the process proceeds to step S1315.

  Here, when a negative determination is made in step S1311, or after execution of step S1314, it means that the recognized prize ball command is three prize ball commands. Therefore, in step S1315, a process of adding 3 to the value of the prize ball number counter 165b is executed, and after the prize ball command that is the prize ball setting target is deleted, the prize ball setting process is terminated.

  Here, the prize ball command is transmitted in accordance with the priority order of one prize ball command → 15 prize ball commands → 10 prize ball commands → 3 prize ball commands. In one timer interrupt process, a plurality of one prize ball commands may be set, while only one other prize ball command is set. Therefore, until the number of prize ball commands to be recognized becomes 15 prize ball commands, it is possible to cope with a single prize ball command that is transmitted in a batch by repeatedly executing the processing of step S1303 to step S1306. It becomes possible. In addition, the corresponding process of each prize ball command is executed in accordance with the order of the prize ball commands to be output, and the prize ball command other than one prize ball command is executed when the corresponding process related to the prize ball command is executed. Is configured to execute a corresponding process relating to the next prize ball command.

<Discharge control processing>
Next, the payout control process of step S808 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the payout control process, a payout state setting process is executed in step S1401. In the payout state setting process, at least one of the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by checking the state of the flag provided in the payout side RAM 165 in step S1501, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. In step S1502, it is determined whether a payout error state is present. The payout error state is a state corresponding to any one of the full state of the lower plate 34, the absence of the ball of the tank 121, and the payout abnormality state of the payout device 124. Also, in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter 165b of the payout side RAM 165 is “0” and the value of the number of lending counter provided in the payout side RAM 165 is “0”. To do. The number-of-lending counter is a counter for specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent out by the payout side MPU 163 when a player performs a renting instruction operation.

  If a negative determination is made in all of steps S1501 to S1503, in step S1504, “1” is set in any of the full tank low speed flag, the ball no low speed flag, and the prize ball low speed flag in the payout side RAM 165. It is determined whether or not. If “1” is not set in any of the low speed flags, the payout motor 137 is set to the normal state in step S1505, and then the payout state setting process is terminated. Thereby, one game ball is paid out from the payout device 124 every 60 msec. Note that if the normal state has already been set, the state is maintained.

  If “1” is set in any of the low speed flags, the payout motor 137 is set to the low speed state in step S1506, and then the payout state setting process is terminated. Thereby, one game ball is paid out from the payout device 124 every 800 msec. If the low speed state has already been set, that state is maintained.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S1501 to S1503, the payout motor 137 driving state is set to a stopped state in step S1507, and then the payout state setting process is terminated. As a result, the output of the drive signal from the payout side MPU 163 to the payout motor 137 is stopped, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 124 is stopped. If the game ball has already been paid out, this state is maintained.

  Here, not only when the front door frame 14 is in the open state but also when the main body frame 13 is in the open state, the payout of the game ball from the payout device 124 is stopped. For example, when an abnormality occurs in a situation where a game is being performed in a game hall, the game hall administrator opens the game machine main body 12 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the middle of the game (i.e., (Opening operation of the main body frame 13) may be performed. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the payout of the game ball is not stopped during the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened in a state where the discharging operation portion 35 of the lower plate 34 is locked in the discharging operation state. In this case, there is a possibility that the game balls discharged toward the lower plate 34 in that situation are scattered in the game hall. On the other hand, when the discharge operation unit 35 of the lower plate 34 is locked in the discharge operation state during the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or when the discharge operation state is released, the opening operation is performed. Workability is reduced. On the other hand, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, the payout of the game ball is stopped, so that it is possible to prevent the above inconvenience from occurring.

  Returning to the explanation of the payout control process (FIG. 28), after executing the payout state setting process in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 138 of the payout device 124. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the output level of the payout ball detection signal output from the payout ball detection sensor 138 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, when it is confirmed twice that the LOW level has been switched to the HI level, it is determined that a game ball has been detected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the payout control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not a ball lending operation is in progress. If the ball lending operation is not in progress, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number counter 165b in the payout side RAM 165 in step S1404. Thereafter, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter 165b is “2” or less. If it is not “2” or less, the payout control process is terminated as it is. If it is “2” or less, in step S 1406, the payout low speed flag in the payout side RAM 165 is set to “1”, and then the payout control process ends. On the other hand, if the renting operation is being performed, the payout control process is terminated after subtracting 1 from the value of the rented number counter in the payout side RAM 165 in step S1407.

<Prize ball permission signal setting processing>
Next, the winning ball permission signal setting process in step S809 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is open by checking the main body frame opening flag and the front door frame opening flag of the payout side RAM 165. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning ball counter 165b of the payout side RAM 165 is 3 or less. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not a payout error state is present. In step S1604, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the full tank low speed flag of the payout side RAM 165. In step S1605, it is determined. Thus, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the ball no low speed flag of the payout side RAM 165.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, a negative determination is made in step S1603, a negative determination is made in step S1604, and a further negative determination is made in step S1605, In S1606, after setting the winning ball permission state, the winning ball permission signal setting process is terminated. By setting the prize ball permission state, if the output state of the prize ball permission signal is already at the HI level, the state is maintained, and if the output state of the prize ball permission signal is at the LOW level, the state is changed to the HI level. .

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, a negative determination is made in step S1602, a positive determination is made in step S1603, an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, or an affirmative determination is made in step S1605. In such a case, in step S1607, the prize ball permission signal setting process is terminated after the prize ball is not permitted. By setting the prize ball not permitted state, if the output state of the prize ball permission signal is already LOW level, the state is maintained, and if the output state of the prize ball permission signal is HI level, it is changed to LOW level. The

  As described above, the value of the prize ball number counter 165b of the payout side RAM 165 is 3 or less, and the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in a closed state, not in a payout error state, not in a full tank low speed state, and more When not in the no-low speed state, the output state of the prize ball permission signal becomes the HI level, and the output of the prize ball command from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 is permitted.

  When the main body frame 13 is in the open state, the front door frame 14 is in the open state, or the payout error state, the payout of the game ball from the payout device 124 is stopped. The In this pachinko machine 10, since the backup power is not supplied to the payout side RAM 165, when a prize ball command is output in the situation where the payout of the game ball is stopped as described above, the payout of the game ball is stopped. If the power supply is stopped, the prize ball corresponding to the prize ball command is erased without being paid out. On the other hand, in the situation where the payout of the game ball is stopped like the present pachinko machine 10, the output state of the prize ball command is prohibited by setting the output state of the prize ball permission signal to the LOW level. Such inconvenience can be suppressed.

  The full tank low speed state or the ball no low speed state is a state that is set as a preceding stage when there is a high possibility of a payout error state thereafter, and the payout of game balls is stopped in the payout error state. In contrast, when it is determined that there is a high possibility of a payout error state, the payout ball permission signal output state is set to the LOW level to prohibit the output of a prize ball command, thereby entering a payout error state. The output of the prize ball command can be prohibited before, and the possibility of the above inconvenience is drastically reduced.

<About the output of the prize ball command in response to the prize ball permission signal>
Next, the manner in which the prize ball command is output in response to the prize ball permission signal will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the output status of the four prize ball commands, FIG. 31 (b) shows the output status of the prize ball permission signal, FIG. 31 (c) shows the driving state of the payout motor 137, and FIG. (D) shows the detection period of the game ball in the payout ball detection sensor 138. In the explanation using FIG. 31, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that only a winning corresponding to four prize balls occurs among a plurality of kinds of winnings.

  First, a case where a single winning is generated will be described.

  In a situation where a winning ball permission signal of HI level has already been output from the payout side MPU 163 to the main side MPU 83, when a winning occurs at the timing t1, four winning ball commands are output from the main side MPU 83 to the payout side MPU 163. Is done. As a result, information on the number of four prize balls is stored in the payout side RAM 165, and when the permitted reference number is exceeded, the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level, and the payout of game balls is started. .

  Thereafter, by paying out one game ball at the timing of t2, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes three of the permitted reference number. Thereby, the output state of the winning ball permission signal is set to the HI level. Thereafter, the payout of one game ball is further executed at the timing of t3, so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes two of the switching reference number. As a result, the driving state of the payout motor 137 is switched from the normal state to the low speed state. Thereafter, by paying out two game balls by the timing of t4, information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes zero. As a result, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 137 is stopped, and the payout of the prize ball is ended.

  Next, a case will be described in which a winning occurs again in a situation where the driving state of the payout motor 137 is a low speed state after a single winning has occurred.

  In a situation where a pay ball permission signal of HI level has already been output from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83, a winning is generated at the timing t5, so that four pay ball commands are output from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163. Is done. As a result, information on the number of four prize balls is stored in the payout side RAM 165, and when the permitted reference number is exceeded, the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level, and the payout of game balls is started. .

  Thereafter, by paying out one game ball at the timing of t6, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes three of the permitted reference number. Thereby, the output state of the winning ball permission signal is set to the HI level. Thereafter, the payout of one game ball is further executed at the timing of t7, whereby the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes two of the switching reference number. As a result, the driving state of the payout motor 137 is switched from the normal state to the low speed state.

  Thereafter, when a new winning occurs at a timing t8 within which the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 is not zero, four prize balls are given from the main MPU 83 to the payout side MPU 163. The command is output. As a result, the information on the number of four prize balls is stored in the payout side RAM 165, and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level by exceeding the permitted reference number, and the payout by exceeding the switching reference number The driving state of the motor 137 is returned from the low speed state to the normal state.

  Next, a case where winnings occur continuously will be described.

  As described above, when a new winning is generated at timing t8, four winning ball commands are output from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163. Thereby, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes five by adding a new number of prize balls to the number of prize balls stored so far.

  Thereafter, by paying out two game balls by the timing of t9, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes three of the permitted reference number. Thereby, the output state of the winning ball permission signal is set to the HI level. In this case, winnings are generated continuously until the timing t9, and a plurality of pieces of information on four prize balls are stored in the main RAM 85. Thereafter, four prize ball commands are output from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 at a timing t10 which is a timing before a new game ball is paid out. In addition, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 at the timing of t11 becomes the permission reference number, and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the HI level. Thereafter, four prize ball commands are output from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 at a timing t12, which is a timing before a new game ball is paid out.

  That is, in a situation where the prize ball information is already stored in the main RAM 85, the prize ball information stored in the payout RAM 165 becomes the permission reference number, and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the HI level. In this case, a prize ball command is output from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 at a timing before a new game ball is paid out, and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout RAM 165 is the permitted reference number. Will be exceeded.

  This is due to the following reason. The payout speed in the normal state of the payout motor 137 is set so that one game ball is paid out at intervals of 60 msec. On the other hand, in the payout side MPU 163, the time required for the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 to become the permission reference number and the output state of the prize ball permission signal to be set to the HI level is a timer interrupt. It is within the range of 2 msec, which is within the range of processing execution time. In addition, the time required for outputting a prize ball command specified as being permitted to output a prize ball command based on the input of a prize ball permission signal in the main MPU 83 is in the range of 20 msec to 24 msec. . In addition, the time required for the payout side MPU 163 to input a prize ball command from the main side MPU 83 and add information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command to the payout side RAM 165 is the execution time of the timer interrupt process. It is in the range of 2 msec which is in the range of. In addition, even if the time required for the transmission of the winning ball permission signal and the winning ball command, the error in processing time, and the like are included, the information on the number of winning balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes the permission reference number. The time required for the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 to exceed the permitted reference number by inputting the prize ball command is about 40 msec at the maximum. This is shorter than 60 msec which is the time required for paying out one game ball. That is, when the prize ball permission signal output state is set to the HI level in the situation where the prize ball information is already stored in the main RAM 85, the prize is given at the timing before the new game ball is paid out. The processing time for prize balls in the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163 is set so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 after the ball command is output exceeds the permitted reference number.

  Further, in the above configuration, the permission reference number that triggers the output state of the winning ball permission signal to be set to the HI level is the switching reference that triggers the switching of the driving state of the payout motor 137 from the normal state to the low speed state. One game ball is set more than the number. Thus, in a situation where a plurality of prize ball information is stored in the main side RAM 85, the prizes stored in the payout side RAM 165 until all the output of each prize ball command corresponding to the prize ball information are executed. The information on the number of balls does not reach the switching reference number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the payout speed of the payout motor 137 from being switched from the normal cycle to the low speed cycle in spite of the award ball information being stored in the main side RAM 85, and to smoothly pay out the game ball. It can be carried out.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 31, thereafter, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout-side RAM 165 at the timing of t13 becomes the permission reference number, and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the HI level. Further, by further executing payout of one game ball at the timing of t14, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 becomes two of the switching reference number, and the driving state of the payout motor 137 is changed. The normal state is switched to the low speed state. Thereafter, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 165 at the timing of t15 becomes zero, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 137 is stopped, and the payout of prize balls is completed.

<Operation at power-on>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main MPU 83, the sound light MPU 93, and the payout MPU 163 when the power is turned on will be described. Prior to the description of these various processes, the configuration of communication among the main MPU 83, the sound light MPU 93, and the payout MPU 163 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 are electrically connected by the first signal path group SLG1 and electrically connected by the second signal path group SLG2.

  A command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 using the first signal path group SLG1. The command is transmitted in parallel communication by using a plurality of signal paths for parallel communication included in the first signal path group SLG1. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to be transmitted by serial communication. The command transmitted using the first signal path group SLG1 has a data structure of 2 bytes, and the upper 1 byte is set with data that allows the payout side MPU 163 to specify the type of its own command. Data of contents instructing the payout MPU 163 is set in 1 byte. For example, in the case of a prize ball command, data indicating that it is a prize ball command is set in the upper 1 byte, and data on the number of prize balls that are the target of the prize ball instruction is set in the lower 1 byte. Yes.

  By using the first signal path group SLG1, the prize ball command described above is transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163. In addition, a communication confirmation command described later is transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163.

  A command is transmitted from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83 using the second signal path group SLG2. The command is transmitted by serial communication by using a plurality of signal paths for serial communication included in the second signal path group SLG2. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to transmit by parallel communication. The command transmitted using the second signal path group SLG2 has a 1-byte data configuration, and data indicating the type of the command is set in the 1-byte data. The command transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 to the main side MPU 83 does not include a command having a plurality of patterns of instruction contents, such as a prize ball command. Only the data shown is set. The second signal path group SLG2 includes a signal path for outputting a prize ball permission signal from the payout side MPU 163 to the main side MPU 83.

  By using the second signal path group SLG2, the already-described prize ball permission signal is transmitted. In addition, the full tank state command, full tank release command, no ball state command, no ball release command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, front door frame open command, front door frame close command, etc. that have already been described are transmitted. The

  Here, the payout control board 162 is provided with a monitoring IC 163c. The monitoring IC 163 c is a circuit for confirming an abnormality in the signal path that electrically connects the payout ball detection sensor 138 and the payout side MPU 163. Details of this confirmation will be described later. When the payout side MPU 163 specifies that an abnormality has occurred in the signal path with the payout ball detection sensor 138, the payout side MPU 163 transmits a command corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality using the second signal path group SLG2. In addition, when the payout MPU 163 specifies that various abnormalities including the signal path abnormality have occurred, the payout control device 161 itself provides a notification corresponding to the specified abnormality type. As shown, the status display unit 161a is controlled by the payout MPU 163.

  As described above, the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 are electrically connected using the first signal path group SLG1 and the second signal path group SLG2, whereas the main MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93 are electrically connected. Are electrically connected using only the third signal path group SLG3, and the command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound light MPU 93, whereas the sound light MPU 93 is transmitted to the main MPU 83. Not sent. That is, the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163 communicate commands bidirectionally, while the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93 are unidirectional communication from the main side MPU 83 to the sound light side MPU 93. ing.

  Note that the payout side MPU 163 and the sound light side MPU 93 are not electrically connected, and the payout side MPU 163 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in such a manner that the main side MPU 83 relays it. The sound control side MPU 93 executes notification control for the occurrence of the abnormality identified in step S2.

  A command transmitted from the main side MPU 83 to the sound light side MPU 93 using the third signal path group SLG3 is transmitted by serial communication by using a plurality of signal paths for serial communication included in the third signal path group SLG3. Sent. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to transmit by parallel communication. A command transmitted using the third signal path group SLG3 has a data structure of 2 bytes.

  Of the two-byte data commands, the command for instructing the contents of the effect to the sound side MPU 93 is set to data in which the type of the command can be specified in the light side MPU 93 in the upper 1 byte. Data indicating the content of the production for the type of production section corresponding to is set. For example, in the case of a change command, data indicating that it is a change command is set in the upper 1 byte, and data indicating the display duration of game times is set in the lower 1 byte. Such commands include a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, an ending command, and the like in addition to the command for variation.

  On the other hand, the command for instructing the sound light side MPU 93 to set or cancel the state notification of the pachinko machine 10 or the abnormality notification, and the command to instruct that the abnormality notification is not required are the notification commands in the upper 1 byte. Data that makes it possible for the sound-side MPU 93 to specify that it is present is set, and in the lower 1 byte, status notification or abnormality notification type data and notification setting or release data are set. For example, when an abnormality directly related to fraud such as vibration or magnet is specified in the main MPU 83, common data indicating that it is a notification system is set in the upper 1 byte and specified in the lower 1 byte. Data corresponding to the abnormality and data indicating that notification for the abnormality should be started are set. Further, for example, when a main body frame release command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 to the main side MPU 83, the upper 1 byte data is added to the main body frame release command of 1 byte data as described above. In the upper 1 byte, common data indicating that it is a notification system is set, and in the lower 1 byte, data of the main body frame release command itself transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 is set. The light-side MPU 93 specifies that notification indicating that the main body frame 13 is in an open state should be started based on the data of the lower one byte main body frame opening command itself.

  When the sound light side MPU 93 receives an effect-type command, the sound light side MPU 93 controls the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 so that the effect corresponding to the command is executed. In addition, by transmitting a command for presentation corresponding to the command to the display control device 96, the symbol display device 61 executes the presentation corresponding to the command for presentation. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives a notification command, the sound light side MPU 93 controls the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 so that notification corresponding to the command is started or ended. In addition, by transmitting a notification command corresponding to the command to the display control device 96, notification in the symbol display device 61 corresponding to the notification command is started or ended.

  Next, the main-side power-on wait process executed when the main-side MPU 83 is turned on will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The main-side power-on wait process is executed in step S101 in the main process (FIG. 12).

  In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the main wait time has elapsed. The main-side wait time is a time for waiting for execution of processing for performing various settings at power-on in the main-side MPU 83 after the supply of operating power to the main-side MPU 83 is started. Is set to 1 sec. The measurement of the main wait time may be performed by a hardware circuit, or may be performed using a software timer counter. Further, instead of a configuration in which the elapse of the main wait time is monitored in the program, the reset signal to the main MPU 83 is output when the main wait time elapses after the supply of operating power to the main control board 82 is started. The main MPU 83 may be configured to start operation when output is started.

  It waits in step S1701 until the main wait time elapses. If the main-side wait time has elapsed, the main-side power-on wait process is terminated after transmitting a sound-side communication confirmation command to the sound-side MPU 93 in step S1702. The sound side communication confirmation command has a data structure of 2 bytes and is transmitted from the main side MPU 83 to the sound side MPU 93 to confirm whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred in the third signal path group SLG3. Command.

  Next, main processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the register of the sound light side MPU 93 is initialized, and the output states of the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 and the command output state to the display control device 96 are initialized. In the subsequent step S1802, initialization processing of the sound side RAM 95 is executed. When the sound light side RAM 95 is initialized in a configuration in which the backup light is not supplied to the sound light side RAM 95, various processes are executed in the sound light side MPU 93 while the data in the sound light side RAM 95 is abnormal. Is prevented.

  Thereafter, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not a sound side communication confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83. If the communication confirmation command on the sound light side has been received, the periodic processing from step S1806 is executed.

  On the other hand, if the sound light side communication confirmation command has not been received, has the sound light side first monitoring time elapsed since the supply of operating power to the sound light side MPU 93 was started in step S1804? Determine whether or not. The light-side first monitoring time is set as a time longer than the above-described main-side wait time (specifically 1 sec) and shorter than a payout-side wait time (specifically 2 sec) described later. Specifically, it is set to 1.5 sec. If the sound light side first monitoring time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S1803 to determine whether or not a sound light side communication confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83. If the sound light side first monitoring time has elapsed, a first monitoring abnormality notification process is executed in step S1805.

  The measurement of the sound light side first monitoring time is performed using a timer counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95, but is not limited to this, and is performed using a hardware circuit. May be.

  In the first monitoring abnormality notification process, the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 are controlled so that notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred in communication between the main MPU 83 and the sound light MPU 93 is started. In addition, a command corresponding to the first monitoring abnormality is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 controls the symbol display device 61 so that a notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred in communication between the main MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93 is started. The first monitoring abnormality notification is continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, or if the processing in step S1805 is executed, the periodic processing shown in step S1806 and subsequent steps is executed. In the periodic process, first, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the post-startup monitoring flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. The post-startup monitoring flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 whether or not a reception confirmation command has already been received from the main side MPU 83 after the supply of operating power to the sound light side MPU 93 is started. Yes, “1” is set to the post-startup monitoring flag after the RAM initialization process (step S1802) is executed after the supply of operating power is started.

  If “1” is set in the post-startup monitoring flag, the process advances to step S1812. The processing contents when the processing proceeds to step S1812 will be described in detail later. If “1” is not set in the post-startup monitoring flag, the process advances to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not a new command is received from the main MPU 83. If a new command has been received, processing corresponding to the newly received command is executed in step S1808. In the command handling process, a process for setting a data table corresponding to the newly received command is executed.

  For example, when a variation command is received, an execution lottery process corresponding to the variation command is executed to determine the execution content of the game times effect corresponding to the variation command. Then, the data table for light emission control and the data table for sound output control corresponding to the determined execution contents are read from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. Thus, in the light emission control process in step S1809, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is executed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process of step S1810, the sound output control of the speaker unit 26 is executed according to the data table. An effect using the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 is executed. Further, in the command corresponding process in step S1808, an effect-type command corresponding to the determined execution content is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the production-related command, reads out a display control data table corresponding to the content of the production, and executes display control of the symbol display device 61 based on the readout data table. Thereby, the effect using the symbol display device 61 is executed.

  For example, when a notification command is received, the light emission control data table and the sound output control data table corresponding to the notification command are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. . Thus, in the light emission control process in step S1809, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is executed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process of step S1810, the sound output control of the speaker unit 26 is executed according to the data table. The notification using the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 is executed. Further, in the command response processing in step S 1808, the notification-type command is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the notification-related command, reads a display control data table corresponding to the notification-related command, and executes display control of the symbol display device 61 based on the read-out data table. Thereby, the notification using the symbol display device 61 is executed.

  If execution of a series of periodic processes is completed, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not it is the start timing of a new periodic process. The periodic process is a process that is newly started at a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec). In step S1811, it is determined whether or not a time corresponding to the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the current periodic process. If a negative determination is made in step S1811, the process waits in step S1811, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1811, the process returns to step S1806 to start a new periodic process.

  Next, payout-side communication confirmation processing executed after the power is turned on in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout side communication confirmation process is executed in step S109 in the main process (FIG. 12).

  In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the payout-side wait time has elapsed. Here, in the payout side MPU 163, as will be described in detail later, the payout side MPU 163 supplies power until the payout side wait time (specifically, 2 sec) elapses after the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started. Execution of processing for performing various settings at startup is awaited. This payout-side wait time is set as a time longer than the main-side wait time. The main MPU 83 starts measuring time after the start of supply of operating power to the main MPU 83. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the measurement result corresponds to the elapse of the payout side wait time. .

  It waits in step S1901 until the payout-side wait time elapses. If the payout-side wait time has elapsed, a payout-side communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout-side MPU 163 in step S1902, and then the payout-side communication confirmation processing ends. The payout side communication confirmation command has a data structure of 2 bytes, and is a command transmitted from the main side MPU 83 to the payout side MPU 163 in order to confirm whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred in the first signal path group SLG1. It is.

  Next, payout-side power-on wait processing executed at power-on in the payout-side MPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The power-on wait process on the payout side is executed in step S701 in the main process (FIG. 18).

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the payout-side wait time has elapsed. As described above, the payout-side wait time is a time for waiting for execution of processing for making various settings at power-on in the payout-side MPU 163 after the supply of operating power to the payout-side MPU 163 is started. Specifically, it is set to 2 seconds longer than the main wait time. The payout-side wait time may be measured by a hardware circuit or may be configured by using a software timer counter. Further, instead of a configuration in which the elapse of the payout-side wait time is monitored in the program, a reset signal to the payout-side MPU 163 when the payout-side wait time elapses after the supply of operating power to the payout control board 162 is started. It may be configured that the payout side MPU 163 starts operation when output is started.

  The process waits in step S2001 until the payout-side wait time elapses. If the payout-side wait time has elapsed, initial setting is performed in step S2002. In this initial setting, the register of the payout side MPU 163 is initialized and the driving state of the payout device 124 is initialized. In a succeeding step S2003, an initial display process for setting the display content in the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 to an initial state is executed. Thereafter, access to the payout side RAM 165 is permitted in step S2004, and the payout side RAM 165 is initialized in step S2005.

  Thereafter, in step S2006, it is determined whether or not a payout side communication confirmation command is received from the main MPU 83. If the communication confirmation command on the payout side has been received, the reception confirmation command is transmitted to the main MPU 83 in step S2007. The reception confirmation command has a 1-byte data structure.

  On the other hand, if the payout side communication confirmation command has not been received, in step S2008, it is determined whether or not the payout side monitoring time has elapsed since the start of the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163. . The payout side monitoring time is set as a time longer than the payout side wait time (specifically, 2 sec), and is specifically set to 2.5 sec. If the payout side monitoring time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S2006 to determine whether or not a payout side communication confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83. If the payout side monitoring time has elapsed, in step S2009, a communication abnormality notification setting is executed. Specifically, the display content on the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the communication abnormality. This display state is continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  The payout side monitoring time is measured using a timer counter provided in the payout side RAM 165, but is not limited to this, and may be performed using a hardware circuit.

  When the payout side monitoring time elapses, the status display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 performs notification corresponding to the communication abnormality as described above. However, in this situation, the sound light side MPU 93 also has a communication abnormality. Processing for executing the corresponding notification is executed. Specifically, in the main process (FIG. 34) of the sound light side MPU 93, when a new command is received from the main side MPU 83, the sound light side RAM 95 is monitored after startup in step S1806. Whether or not “1” is set in the flag is monitored. If “1” is set in the post-startup monitoring flag, the process proceeds to step S1812.

  In step S1812, it is determined whether a reception confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83. As described above, when the payout-side MPU 163 specifies that the payout-side communication confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83 in the payout-side power-on wait process (FIG. 36), the payout-side MPU 163 concerned. To the main MPU 83 (step S2007). The main MPU 83 monitors whether or not a reception confirmation command has been received from the payout MPU 163 in the payout state reception process (FIG. 26). Specifically, when a reception confirmation command is received from payout-side MPU 163 (step S1201: YES), upper byte addition processing is executed in step S1202. In the addition process, common 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to the reception confirmation command received this time. In step S1203, a 2-byte data reception confirmation command after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

  When the sound light side MPU 93 receives a reception confirmation command from the main side MPU 83, an affirmative determination is made in step S1812 of the main process (FIG. 34), and the light emission control process in step S1809 and the sound output control process in step S1810 are executed. To do. On the other hand, if the reception confirmation command has not been received from the main MPU 83 and a negative determination is made in step S1812, it is determined in step S1813 whether or not the second light monitoring time has elapsed. The sound light side second monitoring time is set as a time longer than the above-described payout side monitoring time (specifically, 2.5 sec), and is specifically set to 3 sec. If the sound side second monitoring time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S1807. When the sound light side second monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1807 after executing the second monitoring abnormality notifying process in step S1814.

  The measurement of the sound light side second monitoring time is performed using a timer counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95, but is not limited thereto, and is performed using a hardware circuit. May be.

  In the second monitoring abnormality notification process, the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 are controlled so that notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred in communication between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 is started. In addition, a command corresponding to the second monitoring abnormality is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 controls the symbol display device 61 so that notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred in communication between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 is started. The second monitoring abnormality notification is continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

<Communication abnormality monitoring at power-on>
With reference to the time chart of FIG. 37, the state of communication abnormality monitoring at power-on will be described.

  FIG. 37A shows a period in which the main MPU 83 is in an activated state, FIG. 37B shows a command output timing from the main MPU 83, and FIG. 37C shows that the payout MPU 163 is in an activated state. 37 (d) shows the command output timing from the payout side MPU 163, and FIG. 37 (e) shows the time period during which the communication abnormality notification is executed in the status display portion 161a of the payout control board 162. FIG. 37 (f) shows a period during which the sound light side MPU 93 is in an activated state, and FIG. 37 (g) shows a communication abnormality notification execution period in the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, a case where no communication abnormality occurs will be described.

  At the timing t1, supply of operating power to all of the main MPU 83, the sound light MPU 93, and the payout MPU 163 is started. However, only the sound light side MPU 93 is activated at this timing as shown in FIG. 37 (f), and the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163 are in a standby state for activation.

  Thereafter, when the main wait time elapses at the timing t2, the main MPU 83 is activated as shown in FIG. 37A, and at the subsequent t3, as shown in FIG. A command is output from the side MPU 83. This command is a sound confirmation command on the sound light side, and since no communication abnormality has occurred in the third signal path group SLG3 this time, as shown in FIG. This process is not executed.

  Thereafter, when the payout-side wait time elapses at the timing of t4, the payout-side MPU 163 is activated as shown in FIG. 37C, and at the subsequent timing of t5, as shown in FIG. A command is output from the side MPU 83. This command is a payout side communication confirmation command. Since no communication abnormality has occurred in the first signal path group SLG1 this time, communication abnormality notification is executed in the status display unit 161a as shown in FIG. Not. At the subsequent timing of t6, a reception confirmation command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 as shown in FIG. In addition, since no communication abnormality has occurred in the second signal path group SLG2 this time, the reception confirmation command is normally received by the main MPU 83. Therefore, at the subsequent timing t7, as shown in FIG. 37B, a reception confirmation command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound light MPU 93. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), the processing for notifying communication abnormality is not executed in the sound light side MPU 93.

  Next, a case where a communication abnormality occurs in the third signal path group SLG3 between the main MPU 83 and the sound light MPU 93 will be described.

  At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 37 (f), the sound light side MPU 93 is activated. Thereafter, when the main wait time elapses at the timing t9, the main MPU 83 is activated as shown in FIG. 37A, and at the subsequent t10, as shown in FIG. The MPU 83 transmits a sound side communication confirmation command to the sound side MPU 93. However, since a communication abnormality has occurred in the third signal path group SLG3 this time, the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the sound light side communication confirmation command. Therefore, at the timing t11 when the sound light side first monitoring time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), the sound light side MPU 93 executes a communication abnormality notification process. This communication abnormality notification is performed in a state in which it is possible to specify that a communication abnormality has occurred in the communication path between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93. It is possible to take measures to eliminate the problem.

  The payout with the main MPU 83 triggered by transmission of the payout side communication confirmation command from the main MPU 83 after the timing t11, regardless of whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred in the third signal path group SLG3. Communication abnormality monitoring with the side MPU 163 is executed.

  Next, a case where a communication abnormality occurs in the first signal path group SLG1 between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 will be described.

  At timing t12, as shown in FIG. 37 (f), the sound light side MPU 93 is activated. Thereafter, when the main wait time elapses at the timing of t13, the main MPU 83 is activated as shown in FIG. 37A, and at the subsequent t14, as shown in FIG. The MPU 83 transmits a sound side communication confirmation command to the sound side MPU 93. Since no communication abnormality has occurred in the third signal path group SLG3 this time, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), the communication abnormality notification process is not executed in the sound light side MPU 93.

  Thereafter, when the payout-side wait time elapses at the timing of t15, the payout-side MPU 163 is activated as shown in FIG. 37 (c), and at the subsequent timing of t16, as shown in FIG. A payout side communication confirmation command is transmitted from the side MPU 83 to the payout side MPU 163. However, since a communication abnormality has occurred in the first signal path group SLG1 this time, the payout side MPU 163 does not receive the payout side communication confirmation command. Therefore, at timing t17, which is the timing when the payout side monitoring time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 37 (e), notification corresponding to the communication abnormality is started on the status display portion 161a of the payout control board 162.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), a communication abnormality notification process is executed in the sound light side MPU 93 at the timing t18 when the sound light side second monitoring time elapses thereafter. Since this communication abnormality notification is performed in a state in which it is possible to specify that a communication abnormality has occurred in the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163, the administrator of the game hall will notify the communication abnormality of the communication path. It is possible to take measures to eliminate it.

  In particular, as the communication abnormality notification, not only the notification by the control of the sound light side MPU 93 but also the notification in the state display unit 161a by the control of the payout side MPU 163 is executed, so the first signal path is confirmed by checking the state display unit 161a. It becomes possible to specify in which of the group SLG1 and the second signal path group SLG2 an abnormality has occurred. That is, the communication abnormality notification in the status display unit 161a is not executed when the payout side communication confirmation command is received by the payout side MPU 163, but is executed when the payout side MPU 163 does not receive it. By confirming the state display unit 161a when the device 61 is notified of the communication abnormality between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163, the first signal path group SLG1 and the second signal path group SLG2 are checked. It becomes possible to identify which of the communication anomalies has occurred.

  Returning to the explanation of the power-on wait process (FIG. 36) on the payout side, if the process in step S2007 is executed or if the process in step S2009 is executed, the ball provided in the payout side RAM 165 in step S2010. Set "1" to the no-low speed flag. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on, even if it is not specified that the tank 121 is in a no-ball state, the tank 121 is considered to be in a state where there is a high possibility that the tank 121 is free of balls. The driving state of the device 124 is set to a low speed state. As already described, when the ball no-low speed flag is set to “1”, the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level. Accordingly, the output of a prize ball command from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 is also prohibited.

<Award ball permission signal setting at power-on>
With reference to the time chart of FIG. 38, the setting state of the winning ball permission signal when the power is turned on will be described.

  38A shows a period during which the payout side MPU 163 is in an activated state, FIG. 38B shows a detection period of the ball non-detection sensor 123a, and FIG. 38C shows a setting state of the ball no low speed flag. FIG. 38 (d) shows the output situation of the prize ball permission signal.

  First, the case where the ball 121 in the tank 121 is not actually generated will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the payout side MPU 163 is activated at the timing t1 when the payout side wait time elapses after the supply of the operating power is started. In addition, since the absence of a ball in the tank 121 does not actually occur this time, the detection of a game ball is started by the no-ball detection sensor 123a at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 38 (b). At the timing t1, “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag as shown in FIG. 38 (c), and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 38 (d). Is done.

  After that, by specifying that the tank 121 is not in a no-ball state at the timing of t2, the no-ball low-speed flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Next, a case where the absence of a ball in the tank 121 actually occurs will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the payout-side MPU 163 is activated at the timing t3 when the payout-side wait time has elapsed since the supply of operating power was started. Further, at the timing of t3, “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag as shown in FIG. 38 (c), and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 38 (d). Is done. However, since the absence of a ball in the tank 121 actually occurs this time, the detection of a game ball is not started by the no-ball detection sensor 123a as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), the state where the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level is continued.

  Returning to the explanation of the power-on wait process (FIG. 36) on the payout side, after setting “1” for the ball no-low speed flag in step S2010, after performing the disconnection short circuit monitoring process in step S2011, the payout side The power-on wait process is terminated.

<Disconnection short circuit monitoring processing>
Next, the disconnection / short circuit monitoring process executed in step S2011 of the power-on wait process (FIG. 36) on the payout side will be described.

  In the disconnection / short circuit monitoring process, based on the signal received from the monitoring IC 161c, the payout side MPU 163 grasps whether the disconnection ball detection sensor 138 itself or a disconnection or a short circuit occurs in the middle of the electrical path. Execute the process for

  Here, the function of the monitoring IC 161c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a block diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the electrical connection between the payout ball detection sensor 138 and the monitoring IC 161c, and FIG. 39B shows a signal input state to the monitoring IC 161c. It is explanatory drawing for doing.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the dispensing ball detection sensor 138 is applied with a voltage of 12 V through the input electric path EL4. The electrical path EL4 is connected to the power-on power supply unit 173 via the payout control board 162. The payout ball detection sensor 138 is connected to the monitoring IC 161c through the output electric path EL5, and applies a voltage corresponding to the detection result of the payout ball detection sensor 138 to the monitoring IC 161c. In this case, a plurality of resistors R1 and R2 are connected to the electrical path EL5 for output, and the voltage applied to the monitoring IC 161c by these resistors R1 and R2 is supplied to a predetermined value or less. The function of reducing the current to a predetermined value or less is fulfilled.

  An electrical signal as shown in FIG. 39B is input to the monitoring IC 161c in accordance with whether or not a game ball has passed through the detection unit of the payout ball detection sensor 138. Note that FIG. 39B shows a signal after shaping into a simple waveform for easy understanding. In this case, when the game ball does not pass through the detection unit of the payout ball detection sensor 138, a low level electric signal is input to the monitoring IC 161c, and when the game ball passes through the detection unit, an HI level electric signal is input. It is input to the monitoring IC 161c. When such a LOW level or HI level signal is input, the monitoring IC 161c outputs a corresponding signal to the payout MPU 163 as a winning signal.

  On the other hand, when the disconnection ball detection sensor 138 is disconnected in each of the electric paths EL4, EL5 or inside the sensor, the voltage input from the discharge ball detection sensor 138 to the monitoring IC 161c is lower than when the voltage is LOW level. It becomes Vmin (that is, 0 V) which is a low voltage. In addition, when a short circuit occurs between the electric paths EL4 and EL5 or inside the sensor, Vmax, which is a voltage higher than the case where the voltage input from the dispensing ball detection sensor 138 to the monitoring IC 161c is at the HI level. Become.

  The monitoring IC 161c outputs a disconnection signal and a short-circuit signal to the payout side MPU 163 separately from the winning signal with respect to the payout ball detection sensor 138, and the voltage applied from the payout ball detection sensor 138 becomes Vmin. The disconnection signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the voltage applied from the payout ball detection sensor 138 becomes Vmax, the short circuit signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. By confirming that the payout side MPU 163 is at the HI level, the payout ball detection sensor 138 recognizes that a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  In the disconnection short circuit monitoring process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, it is first determined in step S2101 whether the disconnection signal is at the HI level. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, disconnection occurrence notification setting is executed in step S2102. Specifically, the display content on the status display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the occurrence of disconnection. This display is continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  In a succeeding step S2103, a disconnection occurrence command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. The disconnection generation command has a 1-byte data configuration. The main MPU 83 monitors whether or not a disconnection occurrence command has been received from the payout MPU 163 in the payout state reception process (FIG. 26). Specifically, when a disconnection occurrence command is received from the payout side MPU 163 (step S1204: YES), an upper byte addition process is executed in step S1205. In the addition process, common 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to the disconnection occurrence command received this time. In step S1206, a 2-byte data disconnection generation command after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereby, in the display light emission part 23, the speaker part 26, and the symbol display apparatus 61, the alert | report which shows that the disconnection regarding the payout ball | bowl detection sensor 138 has generate | occur | produced is performed.

  Note that the processing in step S2102 and the processing in step S2103 may be executed when it is confirmed a plurality of times that the disconnection signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, or if the process of step S2103 is executed, it is determined in step S2104 whether the short circuit signal is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, the disconnection short circuit monitoring process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, notification setting for occurrence of a short circuit is executed in step S2105. Specifically, the display content on the state display unit 161a of the payout control board 162 is set to a state corresponding to the occurrence of a short circuit. This display is continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  In the subsequent step S2106, a short-circuit occurrence command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. The short-circuit generation command has a 1-byte data configuration. The main MPU 83 monitors whether or not a short-circuit occurrence command has been received from the payout MPU 163 in the payout state reception process (FIG. 26). Specifically, when a short-circuit occurrence command is received from payout-side MPU 163 (step S1204: YES), upper byte addition processing is executed in step S1205. In the addition process, common 1-byte data indicating a notification-type command is added to the short-circuit occurrence command received this time. In step S1206, a 2-byte data short-circuit occurrence command after the addition processing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereby, in the display light emission part 23, the speaker part 26, and the symbol display apparatus 61, the notification which shows that the short circuit has generate | occur | produced regarding the payout ball | bowl detection sensor 138 is performed.

  Note that the processing in step S2105 and the processing in step S2106 may be executed when it is confirmed a plurality of times that the short circuit signal is at the HI level.

  The state of disconnection / short circuit monitoring will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 41A shows a period during which the payout side MPU 163 is in an activated state, FIG. 41B shows an execution period of the disconnection short circuit monitoring process, and FIG. 41C shows a case where a disconnection short circuit abnormality occurs. An execution period of abnormality notification is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the payout side MPU 163 is activated at the timing t1 when the payout side wait time has elapsed after the supply of the operating power is started. Further, the disconnection / short circuit monitoring process is executed at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Then, in the disconnection / short circuit monitoring process, the occurrence of a disconnection or the occurrence of a short circuit for the payout ball detection sensor 138 is specified, whereby abnormality notification is started as shown in FIG. As the abnormality notification, notification in the state display unit 161a based on the control of the payout side MPU 163 and notification in the speaker unit 26 and the symbol display device 61 based on the control of the sound light side MPU 93 are executed. The abnormality notification is not canceled even if the state return switch 161b of the payout control board 162 is operated.

  Thereafter, the power shut-off operation is performed at the timing t3 and the start-up state of the payout side MPU 163 is ended as shown in FIG. 41A, whereby the abnormality notification is ended as shown in FIG. 41C. The Then, by eliminating the disconnection state or short circuit state while the power is shut off, even if the payout side MPU 163 is again activated at the timing of t4 and the disconnection short circuit monitoring process is executed, the occurrence of disconnection or the occurrence of a short circuit is confirmed. By not being performed, abnormality notification is not started.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When supply of operating power is started, a payout side communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the payout side MPU 163. When the payout side MPU 163 receives the payout side communication check command, the main MPU 83 is directed to the main side MPU 83. Send an acknowledgment command. When the main MPU 83 does not receive the reception confirmation command, the corresponding notification is executed. Accordingly, either the first signal path group SLG1 for transmitting a command from the main MPU 83 toward the payout MPU 163 or the second signal path group SLG2 for transmitting a command from the payout MPU 163 toward the main MPU 83. When a crab communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the start of supply of operating power, and the possibility that a game will be started despite the occurrence of the communication abnormality is reduced. .

  When the main MPU 83 receives the reception confirmation command, the main MPU 83 transmits a corresponding reception confirmation command to the sound light MPU 93. When the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the reception confirmation command from the main side MPU 83, an abnormality occurs in at least one of the first signal path group SLG1 and the second signal path group SLG2 by executing the notification process. Notify that you are doing. Thereby, the communication abnormality notification is executed in the sound light side MPU 93 that performs control for executing various notifications, and the notification execution function can be integrated. In this case, when the payout-side MPU 163 does not receive a payout-side communication confirmation command from the main MPU 83, the payout-side MPU 163 performs notification corresponding to the status display unit 161 a provided in the payout control device 161. Thereby, the manager of the game hall who grasps the occurrence of the communication abnormality based on the control by the sound light side MPU 93 confirms the state display unit 161a, so that the communication abnormality is detected in the first signal path group SLG1 and the second signal path group. It is possible to specify which of the SLGs 2 is occurring.

  In particular, the notification that the communication confirmation command on the payout side has not been received is executed based on the control of the payout side MPU 163 itself in the state display unit 161a provided in the payout control device 161. Does not require communication. Therefore, it is possible to identify a signal path group in which a communication abnormality has occurred while simplifying the communication configuration.

  Further, even if the communication abnormality is notified in the state display unit 161a provided in the payout control device 161 as described above, the communication abnormality notification executed based on the control of the sound light side MPU 93 is performed by the speaker unit 26 and the design. By using the display device 61 or the like, the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are not required for the confirmation. As a result, the notification that the communication abnormality has occurred is easily recognized by the manager of the game hall.

  Even if the main MPU 83 does not receive the reception confirmation command from the payout MPU 163, the main MPU 83 does not perform any processing on it. Thereby, the processing load of the main MPU 83 can be reduced with respect to monitoring of communication abnormality.

  When the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the reception confirmation command from the main side MPU 83 until the second light monitoring side time elapses after the supply of operating power to the sound light side MPU 93 is started, a communication error occurs. Notification corresponding to is started. As a result, it is not necessary for the main MPU 83 to transmit from the main MPU 83 a command indicating that the reception confirmation command has not been received from the payout MPU 163, thereby reducing the processing load on the main MPU 83.

  The sound light side second monitoring time is set as a time longer than the maximum time assumed as the time required to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163. Yes. This reduces the possibility that a communication abnormality notification is executed even though the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 is normal.

  When the supply of operating power in the sound light side MPU 93 is started, the processing after Step S1801, which is a process for setting the supply start state, is started when the supply of operating power in the payout side MPU 163 is started. The processing is started before the processing after step S2002, which is processing for setting the time state. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the sound light side MPU 93 fails to receive the reception confirmation command only by adjusting the start timing of the process for setting the supply start state. It becomes possible to do.

  When the supply of operating power is started, the main MPU 83 transmits a sound light side communication confirmation command to the sound light MPU 93. When the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the sound light side communication confirmation command, the sound light side MPU 93 executes notification processing corresponding thereto. Accordingly, not only the first signal path group SLG1 and the second signal path group SLG2 between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 but also the third signal path group SLG3 between the main MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93. In addition, it is possible to monitor whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred, and if a communication abnormality has occurred, the manager of the game hall can deal with it. As a result, whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred in the configuration in which the processing for distributing the processing load is performed by performing the notification process regarding the communication abnormality between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 in the sound light MPU 93. In the communication path between the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163 and the path between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93. It becomes possible for the manager of the hall to specify.

  When the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the sound light side communication confirmation command from the main side MPU 83 until the first sound light side monitoring time elapses after the supply of the operating power to the sound light side MPU 93 is started. Then, the notification corresponding to the communication abnormality is started. This makes it possible for the sound light side MPU 93 itself to determine whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred with respect to the third signal path group SLG3. Therefore, the structure for determining whether or not the communication abnormality has occurred can be simplified.

  When the supply of operating power in the sound light side MPU 93 is started, the processing after Step S1801, which is a process for setting the supply start state, is started when the supply of operating power in the main side MPU 83 is started. The processing is started before the processing after step S1702 which is processing for setting the time state. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the sound light side MPU 93 fails to receive the sound light side communication confirmation command only by adjusting the start timing of the process for setting the supply start state. Can be prevented.

  The contents of the notification by the notification process when the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the sound light side communication confirmation command and the contents of the notification by the notification process when the sound light side MPU 93 does not receive the reception confirmation command Is different. Thereby, when notification of communication abnormality is performed based on the control by the sound light side MPU 93, by confirming the notification content, the communication path between the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163, and the main side MPU 83 and sound. It becomes possible to specify in which of the communication paths between the optical side MPU 93 the communication abnormality has occurred.

  The main MPU 83 transmits the sound light side communication confirmation command to the sound light side MPU 93 prior to transmitting the payout side communication confirmation command to the payout side MPU 163. Thereby, when each communication path is normal, the reception confirmation command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 before the reception confirmation command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Become. Therefore, the command transmission to the sound light side MPU 93 becomes stepwise, and the sound light side MPU 93 accurately receives the command while suppressing the complication of the configuration for receiving the command. Can be done.

  The sound light side MPU 93 monitors whether or not the sound light side communication confirmation command is received before the sound light side first monitoring time elapses when the supply of operating power is started, and the sound light side second In the configuration for monitoring whether or not the reception confirmation command is received before the monitoring time elapses, the end timing of the sound light side first monitoring time is different from the end timing of the sound light side second monitoring time. As a result, the monitoring time can be shifted, and the notification process can be executed step by step when a communication abnormality is specified.

  When the command transmitted from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83 has a 1-byte data configuration, the command transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound-side MPU 93 has a 2-byte data configuration. When the MPU 83 receives a command such as a reception confirmation command from the payout side MPU 163, the MPU 83 transmits a command in which data for the upper 1 byte is added to the command to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, in the configuration in which the communication method of the command transmitted from the payout MPU 163 toward the main MPU 83 is different from the communication method of the command transmitted from the main MPU 83 toward the sound light MPU 93, the communication method is changed. Processing for matching is executed by the main MPU 83. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 performs the execution control of the notification in relation to the payout side MPU 163 without providing a separate communication path for directly connecting the payout side MPU 163 and the sound light side MPU 93. Is possible.

  When the main MPU 83 receives a notification-type command from the payout-side MPU 163, the main-side MPU 83 only needs to add 1-byte data to the notification-type command and transmit it to the sound light-side MPU 93. The processing load for adapting the method can be reduced.

  When the main MPU 83 receives a notification-type command from the payout-side MPU 163, data added to the notification-type command is common data. Thereby, the processing load for adapting the communication method in the main MPU 83 is reduced.

  The main side MPU 83 transmits a prize ball command only when it receives an HI level prize ball permission signal from the payout side MPU 163. As a result, in a situation where it is not desirable to receive a prize ball command at the payout side MPU 163, it becomes possible to cause the main side MPU 83 to wait for transmission of the prize ball command, and it is possible to suitably pay out game balls. In particular, in a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the main RAM 85 but no backup power is supplied to the payout RAM 165, permission setting for sending a prize ball command using a prize ball permission signal as described above is used. As a result, it is possible to store data indicating that the game ball should be paid out on the main RAM 85 side, and when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, The possibility of invalidating the ball payout opportunity is reduced.

  In the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started, “1” is set in the ball no low speed flag of the payout side RAM 165, so that the prize ball counter area 85 d of the main side RAM 85 is set. Regardless of the state and the state of the winning ball counter 165b of the payout side RAM 165, the output state of the winning ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started in a situation where the tank 121 is in a ball-free state, immediately after the start of the supply of operating power and before the tank 121 is specified to be in a ball-free state The prize ball command is prevented from being transmitted to the payout side MPU 163 at the timing.

  Further, the state in which “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag at the start of the supply of operating power is canceled when a ball no-detection signal of LOW level is received from the ball no-detection sensor 123a. When supply of operating power is started, it is prevented that the waiting state for sending a prize ball command continues more than necessary.

  The ball no low speed flag is a flag that is set to “1” when there is a high possibility that the tank 121 is in a no ball state regardless of whether or not the operation power supply has just started. In the situation where “1” is set to “1”, the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level. In other words, the output state of the prize ball permission signal at the start of the supply of operating power using the configuration for preventing the prize ball command from being transmitted when there is a possibility that the ball 121 is not in the normal state. Can be set to the LOW level. As a result, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as described above while simplifying the configuration.

  When “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag, the payout of the game motor 137 is set to the low speed state instead of stopping the payout of the game ball. As a result, when supply of operating power is started, it is possible to limit the payout of game balls to some extent although the payout of game balls is not stopped.

  When the HI level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147, the reception continuation period required for setting “1” in the full tank flag in the payout side MPU 163 is changed according to the situation. As a result, it is important to accurately detect that the lower plate 34 is fully filled, and to limit the payout of game balls at an early stage when the lower plate 34 becomes full. It is possible to create an important situation. Therefore, it is possible to limit the payout of the game ball when the HI level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147, and to cope with the full state of the lower plate 34 appropriately. It becomes possible.

  The reception continuation period is set to be shorter in the case immediately after the supply of the operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started than in the subsequent situation. As a result, when supply of operating power is started in a state where the lower tray 34 is full, game balls connected from the lower tray 34 are restricted by the payout device 124 by restricting the payout of game balls at an early stage. The possibility of a situation unintended by the designer, such as reaching the position, is reduced. On the other hand, at the normal time not immediately after the supply of operating power is started, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 34 is in a full tank state when a full tank detection signal at the HI level is received from the full tank detection sensor 147. It becomes possible to carry out accurately.

  In particular, since the full tank detection sensor 147 is provided in the game ball distribution unit 125 of the back pack unit 15, the distance between the full tank detection sensor 147 and the payout motor 137 is relatively short. Since the time required to determine that the lower tray 34 is full is set short when the supply of operating power is started, the occurrence of ball clogging in the dispensing device 124 can be prevented.

  Immediately after the supply of operating power to the dispensing-side MPU 163 is started, the driving state of the dispensing motor 137 is during the HI level full-tank detection signal reception continuation period required to determine that the lower plate 34 is full. The period is shorter than the game ball payout period in the normal state. Thereby, when supply of the operating power is started when the lower tray 34 is in a full state, it is determined that the lower tray 34 is in a full state and a new payout is made until the payout of the game ball is restricted. The number of can be 0 or at most about 1. Therefore, it is possible to limit the payout of game balls within a range where no ball clogging occurs in the payout device 124.

  When the supply of operating power is started and a low level full detection signal is received from the full level detection sensor 147, the HI level necessary for determining that the lower plate 34 is full The reception duration of the full tank detection signal is changed from a short period to a long period. As a result, the situation where the reception continuation period is set to a short period can be suppressed in a short period of time, and basically it is possible to accurately monitor whether or not the lower plate 34 is full. It becomes possible to attach importance.

  Whether or not a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred in the payout ball detection sensor 138 is monitored by the monitoring IC 161c. If a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred, an abnormality notification process is executed. Thereby, when the said disconnection or short circuit has generate | occur | produced, it becomes possible to cope with it. In this case, the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification process is canceled when the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is stopped. Thereby, even if the disconnection or the short circuit is illegally generated and the abnormality notification is attempted to be canceled illegally, the action is easily noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of the illegal act.

  The monitoring process of whether or not the disconnection or the short circuit has occurred is executed only when the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started. As a result, the processing load when the monitoring process is executed can be reduced.

  In a normal time after the start of the supply of operating electric power, when the payout ball detection sensor 138 does not detect a game ball even though the payout motor 137 is driven and controlled, a notification process is executed, so a disconnection short circuit Even if the monitoring process is executed only when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to notify if an abnormality has occurred regarding the payout of the game ball, including the occurrence of the disconnection short circuit.

  The disconnection short circuit notification is canceled when the supply of the operating power is stopped, and is not continuously performed when the supply of the operating power is performed thereafter. Thereby, when canceling the disconnection short circuit notification, it is only necessary to execute an operation for stopping the supply of the operating power, and no other operation is required. Therefore, the disconnection short circuit notification is canceled on the manager side of the game hall. Therefore, workability is improved.

  In the configuration in which the occurrence of ball clogging in the dispensing device 124 is released when the state return switch 161b is operated, even if the state return switch 161b is operated, the disconnection short circuit notification is not released. Thereby, even if it tries to cancel the disconnection short circuit notification by operating the state return switch 161b illegally, it can be made impossible.

  When an abnormality is detected in the main MPU 83 and the progress of the game is stopped and a corresponding notification is executed, operation power supply is started while operating the RAM erasing switch 171a in order to cancel it. In the configuration that needs to be performed, it is not necessary to operate the RAM erase switch 171a when starting the supply of operating power when releasing the disconnection short circuit notification. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve workability | operativity in canceling | disconnecting a disconnection short circuit alert | report.

  When the disconnection or the short-circuit occurs, the disconnection / short-circuit notification is executed, while the execution of the process for progressing the game is not limited. As a result, when the disconnection or the short circuit occurs, it is possible to cope with it by executing an abnormality notification, while reducing the possibility that a normal player will be disadvantaged due to such a path abnormality. Is possible.

  When the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 124 is stopped. Thereby, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is operated to be opened in a state where the game equipment is replenished from the island facility to the tank 121 or when the discharge operation unit 35 of the lower plate 34 is operated and is in the discharge state, At this time, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the game balls replenished from the island facility being scattered and the game balls being paid out toward the lower plate 34 being scattered.

  The detection result of the main body frame opening sensor 114 is input to the payout side MPU 163. This eliminates the need to receive a command from the main MPU 83 when the payout MPU 163 determines whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, The configuration for restricting the payout can be simplified.

  The detection result of the front door frame opening sensor 42 is also input to the payout side MPU 163, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the payout of the game ball is stopped. As a result, the payout side MPU 163 can collectively perform processing for monitoring the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 and processing for restricting the payout of game balls in the open state. Thus, the processing load on the main MPU 83 can be reduced.

  When the main body frame opening sensor 114 detects that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the main body frame opening sensor 114 is configured so that the payout side MPU 163 executes processing for stopping the payout of gaming balls. Is electrically connected to the external terminal 113g for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 113, and the external output when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened is directly from the main frame opening sensor 114 through the external terminal 113g for opening the main body. Done. Thereby, since there is no need to execute any processing in the payout side MPU 163 at the time of the external output, it is possible to perform an external output as to whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is released while reducing the processing load.

  When the front door frame opening sensor 42 detects that the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the front door frame is opened in a configuration in which the payout side MPU 163 performs processing for stopping payout of game balls. The sensor 42 is electrically connected to an external terminal 113h for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 113, and an external output when the front door frame 14 is opened passes through the external terminal 113h for opening the front door. This is done directly from the open sensor 42. Thereby, since there is no need to execute any processing in the payout side MPU 163 at the time of the external output, it is possible to perform an external output as to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened while reducing the processing load.

  When the detection signal of the front door frame opening sensor 42 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening sensor 114 are output to the external terminals 113g and 113h, processing by the payout side MPU 163 is not involved. As a result, whether the gaming machine main body 12 is opened or not and whether the front door frame 14 is opened are monitored by the payout side MPU 163 and the hall computer HC of the gaming hall, respectively. It can be done independently. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in one monitoring path, it is possible to continue monitoring in the other monitoring path, and it is possible to accurately monitor whether the gaming machine main body 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state. Can be done.

  In order to propagate the detection signals of the detection signal of the front door frame opening sensor 42 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening sensor 114 to the payout side MPU 163 and to the external terminals 113g and 113h, respectively. This signal path is branched by the signal relay board 185. As a result, the branching positions of the signal paths are collected on one signal relay board 185, so that maintenance and the like are facilitated.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents executed when an abnormality occurs in the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 are partially different. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the firing control process executed in step S212 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 83.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reception confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 85. The reception confirmation flag indicates to the main MPU 83 whether or not a reception confirmation command has been received from the payout MPU 163 in response to transmission of a payout communication confirmation command from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 when the power is turned on. It is a flag to specify.

  If “1” is not set in the reception confirmation flag, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not a reception confirmation command has been received from the payout MPU 163. If the reception confirmation command has been received, “1” is set to the reception confirmation flag in the main RAM 85 in step S2203.

  When the reception confirmation flag is set to “1” (step S2201: YES), or when the reception confirmation flag is set to “1” (step S2203), after executing the launch process in step S2204 The main firing control process is terminated. In the firing process, when a manual operation for firing a game ball is performed on the game ball launch handle 37, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA at a period of 0.6 sec. In this way, processing for driving and controlling the game ball launching mechanism 45 is executed.

  On the other hand, when “1” is not set in the reception confirmation flag of the main RAM 85 (step S2201: NO) and the reception confirmation command is not received from the payout MPU 163 (step S2202: NO), step S2202 is performed. The process for firing is not executed by making a negative determination at and ending the present firing control process as it is. Thus, until it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in the signal path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163, the launch of the game ball is prohibited, so that no winning is generated. It becomes possible. Therefore, although the prize ball command transmitted from the main MPU 83 cannot be normally received by the payout MPU 163, the output state of the prize ball permission signal from the payout MPU 163 is maintained at the HI level. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the prize ball command is repeatedly transmitted from the side MPU 83 and the prize ball execution is invalidated.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents executed when an abnormality occurs in the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 are partially different. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the payout output process executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 83.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reception confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 85. The reception confirmation flag indicates to the main MPU 83 whether or not a reception confirmation command has been received from the payout MPU 163 in response to transmission of a payout communication confirmation command from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 when the power is turned on. It is a flag to specify.

  If “1” is not set in the reception confirmation flag, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not a reception confirmation command has been received from the payout-side MPU 163. If the reception confirmation command has been received, “1” is set to the reception confirmation flag in the main RAM 85 in step S2303.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that “1” is set in the reception confirmation flag, or if “1” is set in the reception confirmation flag in step S2303, any of the main RAM 85 is determined in step S2304. It is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is 1 or more, and whether or not the output state of the prize ball permission signal received from the payout side MPU 163 is HI level in step S2305. judge. If affirmative determination is made in both step S2304 and step S2305, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout-side MPU 163 by executing a prize ball command output process in step S2306, and one of steps S2304 and S2305 is executed. If a negative determination is made at, the payout output process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the reception confirmation flag of the main RAM 85 (step S2301: NO), and no reception confirmation command is received from the payout side MPU 163 (step S2302: NO), it remains as it is. The payout output process is terminated. In other words, in a situation where the main MPU 83 has not confirmed receipt of the reception confirmation command from the payout MPU 163, the value of any prize ball counter is 1 or more and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is at the HI level. Even if there is a prize ball command, it is not output. As a result, the output of the prize ball command is prohibited until it is specified that no abnormality has occurred in the signal path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163. Therefore, although the prize ball command transmitted from the main MPU 83 cannot be normally received by the payout MPU 163, the output state of the prize ball permission signal from the payout MPU 163 is maintained at the HI level. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the prize ball command is repeatedly transmitted from the side MPU 83 and the prize ball execution is invalidated.

  Note that the configuration in the second embodiment may be added to the configuration in the third embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents executed when an abnormality occurs in the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 are partially different. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the winning ball permission signal setting process executed in step S809 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) in the payout side MPU 163.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in a communication confirmation flag provided in the payout-side RAM 165. The communication confirmation flag is a flag for the payout-side MPU 163 to specify whether or not a payout-side communication confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83 when the power is turned on.

  If “1” is not set in the communication confirmation flag, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not a payout-side communication confirmation command has been received from the main MPU 83. If the communication confirmation command has been received, “1” is set to the communication confirmation flag of the payout side RAM 165 in step S2403.

  When “1” is set in the communication confirmation flag (step S2401: YES), or when “1” is set in the communication confirmation flag (step S2403), other permission conditions are satisfied in step S2404. It is determined whether or not. The other permission conditions are the same as the conditions in steps S1601 to S1605 in the prize ball permission signal setting process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. If other permission conditions are satisfied, the prize ball permission signal setting process is terminated after maintaining or setting the output state of the prize ball permission signal at the HI level in step S2405, and other permission conditions are satisfied. If not, the winning ball permission signal setting process is terminated after maintaining or setting the output state of the winning ball permission signal at the LOW level in step S2406.

  On the other hand, when “1” is not set in the communication confirmation flag of the payout side RAM 165 (step S2401: NO) and the payout side communication confirmation command is not received from the main MPU 83 (step S2402: NO). Regardless of whether other permission conditions are satisfied or not, in step S2406, the output state of the winning ball permission signal is maintained or set to the LOW level, and then the winning ball permission signal setting process is terminated. As a result, the output state of the winning ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level until it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in the signal path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163, and the payout MPU 163 is maintained. It is possible to prevent the award ball command from being transmitted toward. Therefore, although the prize ball command transmitted from the main MPU 83 cannot be normally received by the payout MPU 163, the output state of the prize ball permission signal from the payout MPU 163 is maintained at the HI level. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the prize ball command is repeatedly transmitted from the side MPU 83 and the prize ball execution is invalidated.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the full tank processing (FIG. 20) and the ball non-use processing (FIG. 22) in the payout side MPU 163 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the full tank processing in the present embodiment, even if the period during which the HI level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147 continues, the drive state of the dispensing motor 137 is not set to the low speed state. When the HI level full tank detection signal is received over the full tank stop period, the driving of the payout motor 137 is stopped and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is set to the LOW level. As a result, the processing load required for monitoring whether or not the lower plate 34 is full is reduced.

  Next, the ball useless process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the sphere non-use process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not an HI-level sphere non-detection signal is received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a. When the HI level non-ball detection signal is received, the processing of steps S2502 to S2507 is executed. The processing content of these steps S2502 to S2507 is the same as the processing content of steps S1002 to S1007 of the ball useless processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

  If no HI level ball non-detection signal has been received (step S2501: NO), the value of the first ball no-counter in the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" in step S2508, and then in step S2509. Then, 1 is added to the value of the second ballless counter in the payout side RAM 165. In a succeeding step S2510, it is determined whether or not the value of the second ballless counter is “1500”. The value of the second sphere non-counter is incremented by 1 every 2 msec when a LOW level sphere non-detection signal is received from the sphere non-detection sensor 123a. It is determined whether or not it has been continuously received for about 3000 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2510, the main ball useless process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2510, the ball no-low speed flag in the payout side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” in step S2511. In step S 2512, the ball-less flag in the payout-side RAM 165 is cleared to “0”, a ball-free release command is transmitted to the main MPU 83, and the ball-free abnormality is canceled. End useless processing.

  According to the present embodiment, the state where “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag is not immediately released when the game ball is detected by the ball no-detection sensor 123a, but the game ball is detected. The state is released when the state continues for about 3000 msec. Here, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started as in the first embodiment, the sphere no low speed flag is set to “1” regardless of the detection result of the sphere no detection sensor 123a. Is set, and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level. Further, immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started, when it is confirmed that the HI level full tank detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 147 for 8 msec in the full tank processing, The full tank state is set, the driving of the payout motor 137 is stopped, and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level. That is, immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started, the full flag is set to be longer than the reception duration period of the LOW level ball no detection signal which is a condition for clearing the ball no low speed flag to “0”. HI level full-tank detection signal reception continuation period, which is a condition for setting “1” to, becomes shorter.

  With this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started, the output state of the prize ball permission signal is forcibly maintained at the LOW level by setting the ball no-low speed flag to “1”. In the configuration, when the tank 121 is not in a no-ball state but the bottom plate 34 is in a full tank state, it becomes possible to set the full tank flag to “1” before the ball no low speed flag is cleared to “0”. The output state of the prize ball permission signal can be maintained at the LOW level. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that a prize ball command is output from the main MPU 83 to the payout MPU 163 in spite of the fact that the payout of game balls is actually hindered. .

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) When supply of operating power is started, without waiting for transmission of a payout side communication confirmation command from the main MPU 83 to the payout side MPU 163, or without transmission of the payout side communication confirmation command, The confirmation command may be transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 toward the main side MPU 83. Even in this case, it is possible to monitor whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred in the second signal path group SLG2, which is a command communication path from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83.

  In this configuration, when the main MPU 83 receives a confirmation command from the payout MPU 163, the main MPU 83 transmits the confirmation command or a corresponding command to the sound light MPU 93, and the sound light MPU 93 receives the command. If not, the notification processing is performed, so that it is possible to cope with a communication abnormality occurring in the second signal path group SLG2. The main MPU 83 transmits a confirmation command to the payout MPU 163 regardless of whether the confirmation command is received from the payout MPU 163, and the payout MPU 163 receives the confirmation command. If not, the status display unit 161a may make a notification corresponding thereto.

  (2) The reception confirmation command transmitted from the payout side MPU 163 is not received by the main side MPU 83, and the third signal path group SLG3 or the main control board is passed through the relay circuit formed in the main control board 82. 82 may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by another signal path group provided between the sound light side control board 192 and the sound light side control board 192. In this case, when the reception confirmation command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93, the processing of the main side MPU 83 is not involved, so that the processing load of the main side MPU 83 is reduced.

  (3) In the second embodiment, the progress of the game is restricted such as the prohibition of the launch of the game ball until it is confirmed that no communication abnormality has occurred between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163. However, instead of this, if the reception confirmation command is not received from the payout MPU 163 within the monitoring period after the payout side communication confirmation command is transmitted in the main MPU 83, the launch of the game ball is prohibited. The progress of the game may be limited as described above.

  (4) When a reception confirmation command is received from the payout side MPU 163, the main MPU 83 may transmit a sound light side communication confirmation command to the sound light side MPU 93. Even in this configuration, the sound light side MPU 93 is transmitted from the main side MPU 83 to the sound light side MPU 93 in order to confirm whether or not the communication path between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93 is normal. A command monitoring period, and a command monitoring period transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound light MPU 93 in order to confirm whether or not the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 is normal. In the configuration in which the command is shared as described above by completely differentiating, the sound light side MPU 93 specifies which communication path the confirmation command is received in relation to the monitoring period. Is possible.

  (5) Although the sound light side MPU 93 and the payout side MPU 163 are configured to perform notification that the communication confirmation command or the reception confirmation command has not been received, the communication confirmation command or the reception confirmation command is received instead. In this case, the dedicated light emitting unit or the like may be in a reception state, and it may be configured to grasp whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred by visually confirming that the reception state is not in effect.

  (6) Monitoring result of whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred between the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163, and whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93 At least one of the monitoring results may be output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 113. As a result, the presence or absence of communication abnormality can be managed also in the hall computer HC.

  (7) The communication confirmation between the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163 and the communication confirmation between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93 are not only at the start of the supply of the operating power but also after the start of the supply of the operating power. It may be configured to be executed when a predetermined monitoring start trigger occurs. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred in the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the sound light MPU 93, it is possible to grasp from the display content of the symbol display device 61, etc. While performing both of the communication confirmations, only a communication confirmation between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 may be performed when a subsequent monitoring start trigger occurs. In addition, the monitoring start opportunity may be a case where the game ball is not launched for a predetermined period of time, and an operation for causing the game ball launch handle 37 to fire the game ball is predetermined. It is good also as the said opportunity when it is not performed over this period. In this case, it is possible to perform communication confirmation between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163 by using a period during which it is not necessary to perform the game ball payout execution control.

  (8) When supply of operating power is started, the main MPU 83 is configured to wait for execution of processing until the main wait time elapses. However, the main MPU 83 also receives signals from various sensors during the main wait time. The reception monitoring may be performed, or in addition to or instead of this, the power failure signal reception monitoring from the power failure monitoring circuit and the power failure processing when the power failure signal is received may be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where reception of a signal is missed during the main wait time or a situation where the power failure processing is not normally executed when a power failure occurs during the main wait time. .

  (9) When supply of operating power is started, the payout-side MPU 163 is configured to wait until the payout-side wait time elapses. However, the payout-side MPU 163 receives signals from various sensors even during the payout-side wait time. The monitoring may be configured to be executed, and in addition to or instead of this, the command reception monitoring from the main MPU 83 may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which reception of a signal is missed during the payout-side wait time or a situation in which reception of a command from the main MPU 83 is missed.

  (10) When an abnormality occurs in the communication path between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93, it is possible to grasp from the display contents of the symbol display device 61, etc. It is good also as a structure which does not perform about communication confirmation between the side MPU93.

  (11) When an abnormality has occurred in the communication path between the main MPU 83 and the payout MPU 163, a timer interrupt is performed in the main MPU 83 instead of a configuration in which the abnormality notification is actively executed in the sound light MPU 93. By making an affirmative determination in step S206 of the process (FIG. 13), the process for controlling the progress of the game may not be executed. Even in this case, the display content of the symbol display device 61 or the like becomes abnormal content due to the fact that the game ball cannot be fired and the command transmission to the sound light side MPU 93 is stopped. Through this, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that a communication abnormality has occurred.

  (12) Instead of the configuration in which the main-side MPU 83 transmits a sound-side communication confirmation command to the sound-light-side MPU 93 and then the main-side MPU 83 transmits a pay-out-side communication confirmation command to the pay-out-side MPU 163. These transmission orders may be reversed or simultaneous. Even in this case, the timing at which the sound light side communication confirmation command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 and the timing at which the reception light confirmation command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 are shifted. Commands can be received in stages.

  (13) When the supply of operating power is started, the order of starting the process for setting the supply start state is limited to the order of the sound light side MPU 93 → the main side MPU 83 → the payout side MPU 163. The MPUs 83, 93, and 163 may be started at the same time, for example, as long as the commands for communication confirmation can be normally transmitted / received. For example, the MPU 83 and the main MPU 83 may be used. May be started first, and then the payout side MPU 163 may be started. For example, the payout side MPU 163 → the main side MPU 83 → the sound side MPU 93 may be started in this order.

  (14) When a notification-type command is received from the payout side MPU 163, the data added to the command is not limited to 1 byte, and data of 2 bytes or more may be added. For example, when the command transmitted from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83 has a 1-byte data configuration, and the command transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound-side MPU 93 has a 3-byte data configuration, the main side The MPU 83 adds 2-byte data to the notification-type command received from the payout side MPU 163 and transmits the command after the data addition to the sound light side MPU 93.

  (15) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the communication confirmation is performed between the main side MPU 83 and the payout side MPU 163 and the configuration in which the communication confirmation is performed between the main side MPU 83 and the sound light side MPU 93, It is good also as a structure by which communication confirmation is performed between MPU93 and the display control apparatus 96. FIG. In this case, when the sound light side MPU 93 and the display control device 96 are capable of bidirectional communication, a communication confirmation command is transmitted from one of the sound light side MPU 93 and the display control device 96, and the other receives the communication confirmation command. May be configured to transmit a reception confirmation command to the one side. Thereby, it is possible to specify in which communication path in the bidirectional communication the abnormality occurs.

  (16) When supply of operating power is started, a communication confirmation command is transmitted from the payout MPU 163 to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the communication confirmation command, the main MPU 83 sends a reception confirmation command to the payout MPU 163. It is good also as a structure which transmits. In this case, when the main MPU 83 does not receive the communication confirmation command, the sound light MPU 93 executes the notification process, and when the payout MPU 163 does not receive the reception confirmation command, the status display unit 161a. It is possible to execute notification of each communication abnormality by performing notification corresponding to the above.

  (17) Instead of the configuration in which “1” is set in the ball no-low speed flag in order to maintain the output state of the prize ball permission signal at the LOW level at the start of the supply of operating power, “1” is set in the full tank low speed flag. May be set. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the output state of the winning ball permission signal at the LOW level while preventing the payout motor 137 from being forcibly stopped when the supply of operating power is started. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which "1" is set to a ball-free flag or a full flag at the time of the supply of operating electric power. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, the output state of the prize ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level and the payout motor 137 is forcibly stopped.

  (18) When supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 is started, the exclusive flag provided in the payout side RAM 165 is set to “1” so that the output state of the prize ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level. When it is confirmed that the tank 121 is not in the ball-free state and the lower plate 34 is not in the full state, the dedicated flag is cleared to “0” and the output state of the prize ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state is released.

  (19) In the fifth embodiment, the continuous reception period of the LOW level ball no detection signal necessary for clearing the ball no low speed flag to “0” is the time when supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started. The configuration may be shorter than the normal time thereafter. However, the continuous reception period is longer than the continuous reception period of the HI level full tank detection signal necessary for setting the full tank flag to “1” at the start of supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163. To do. With this configuration, the tank 121 is not in a ball-free state and the lower plate 34 is fully filled at the start of supply of operating power, while achieving the operational effects described in the fifth embodiment. When the state is not the state, the state in which the output state of the winning ball permission signal is maintained at the LOW level can be released early.

  (20) When the output of the HI level full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 147 is continued, “1” is set to the full tank low speed flag before “1” is set to the full tank flag. However, when the full tank low speed flag is not provided and the output of the HI level full tank detection signal is continued, the driving state of the payout motor 137 is stopped without entering the low speed state. It is good also as a structure to be.

  (21) The continuous reception period of the HI level full tank detection signal necessary for setting the full tank flag to “1” is greater when the operation power supply to the payout side MPU 163 starts to be supplied than after the normal time. In addition to or instead of the short configuration, the continuous reception period of the HI level ball no detection signal necessary for setting the ball no flag to “1” is the time when the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started. However, it is good also as a structure shorter than the normal time after that. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started when the tank 121 is in the absence of a ball, it is possible to set “1” to the ball-free flag at an early stage.

  (22) The continuous reception period of the HI level full tank detection signal required for setting the full tank flag to “1” is greater when the operation power supply to the payout MPU 163 is started than after the normal time. In addition to or instead of the short configuration, the continuous reception period may be changed under a predetermined situation different from that at the start of supply of operating power. For example, immediately after the full state of the lower plate 34 is released, the continuous reception period may be set to a shorter period than before. In this case, even if the full state of the lower plate 34 is repeated, it is possible to cope with it suitably. Further, in a situation where the payout frequency of game balls is high, such as an open / close execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode, the continuous reception period may be set to a shorter period than in other cases.

  (23) The continuous reception period of the HI level full tank detection signal necessary for setting the full tank flag to “1” immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout MPU 163 is started. Instead of the configuration in which the period is shorter than the payout cycle when the state is the normal state, the configuration may be a period longer than the payout cycle and shorter than twice the payout cycle.

  (24) The position where the full tank detection sensor 147 is provided is not limited to the game ball distribution unit 125 of the back pack unit 15, and is provided closer to the payout device 124 than the game ball distribution unit 125. Alternatively, it may be provided in a region formed in the main body frame 13 in the payout passage, or may be provided in the passage forming unit 71 of the front door frame 14.

  (25) When disconnection or short circuit occurrence is specified in the disconnection short circuit monitoring process (FIG. 40) of the payout side MPU 163, the progress of the game is triggered by receiving a disconnection generation command or a short circuit generation command in the main MPU 83 May be configured to be limited. Specifically, when a disconnection occurrence command or a short-circuit occurrence command is received, “1” is set in the disconnection short-circuit flag provided in the main RAM 85, and “1” is set in the disconnection short-circuit flag. Then, by making an affirmative determination in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) of the main MPU 83, various processes necessary for controlling the progress of the game including the control of the game ball launch and the winning monitoring can be executed. It is good also as a structure restricted. In addition, when a disconnection short circuit abnormality occurs, the launch of the game ball is not prohibited, but the winning monitoring may be prohibited, and the launch of the gaming ball may be prohibited but the winning monitoring may not be prohibited.

  (26) When the occurrence of disconnection or short circuit is specified in the disconnection / short circuit monitoring process (FIG. 40) of the payout side MPU 163, the information may be output to the outside through the external terminal board 113. In this case, it is possible to monitor the occurrence of disconnection or short circuit in the hall computer HC.

  (27) In order to cancel the disconnection short circuit abnormality notification, it is possible to stop the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and to start the supply of the operating power while operating the RAM erase switch 171a.

  (28) The disconnection short circuit monitoring process (FIG. 40) of the payout side MPU 163 may be executed not only at the start of supply of operating power to the payout side MPU 163 but also at a normal time thereafter. In this configuration, as a trigger for starting the disconnection short circuit monitoring process, a case where the launch of the game ball is not executed for a predetermined period may be the trigger, and the game ball launch handle 37 is caused to launch the game ball. It is good also as the opportunity when operation for this is not performed over a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to perform the disconnection / short circuit monitoring process using a period during which it is not necessary to perform the execution control of the game ball payout.

  (29) It is good also as a structure from which the mode which restrict | limits payout of a game ball is different by the case where the front door frame 14 is open | released, and the case where the main body frame 13 is open | released. For example, the payout motor 137 may be stopped when the front door frame 14 is opened, and the drive state of the payout motor 137 may be set to a low speed state when the main body frame 13 is opened.

  (30) The location where the signal path from the front door frame opening sensor 42 branches into the path toward the payout side MPU 163 and the path toward the external terminal board 113 is not limited to the signal relay board 185, but is paid out. The control board 162 may be branched, or the front door frame opening sensor 42 may be branched in the main body.

  (31) The location where the signal path from the body frame opening sensor 114 branches into a path toward the payout MPU 163 and a path toward the external terminal board 113 is not limited to the signal relay board 185, and payout control It may be configured to branch at the substrate 162 or may be configured to branch within the main body of the main body frame opening sensor 114.

  (32) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the detection signals of the front door frame opening sensor 42 and the main body frame opening sensor 114 are directly output to the external terminal plate 113, the detection signals of other sensors are directly applied to the external terminal plate 113. It is good also as a structure output. For example, a detection signal of a detection sensor that detects a shot ball emitted toward the game area PA may be directly output to the external terminal board 113. In this case, the detection signal of the detection sensor may be output to the main MPU 83 or the payout MPU 163 using a signal path different from the signal path directed to the external terminal board 113, and output to these control means. It is good also as a structure which is not performed. Further, a detection signal of a detection sensor that detects magnets, vibrations, or radio waves may be directly output to the external terminal plate 113. In this case, the detection signal of the detection sensor may be output to the main MPU 83 or the payout MPU 163 using a signal path different from the signal path directed to the external terminal board 113, and output to these control means. It is good also as a structure which is not performed.

  (33) The payout ball detection sensor 138 may have a configuration in which a detection unit that detects a game ball and a detection unit that detects a radio wave are unitized. In this case, when an act of illegally outputting radio waves to the payout ball detection sensor 138 is performed, it can be detected. For example, when the unauthorized radio wave is detected, the state display unit 161a provided in the payout control device 161 may make a notification corresponding thereto, and the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 26, and the symbol display device Corresponding notification may be performed on all or a part of 61, or a configuration in which the information is output to the outside may be employed. Moreover, although the structure for canceling | releasing the said alerting | reporting state is arbitrary, it is good also as a structure which the said alerting | reporting state is cancelled | released, for example, when the state return switch 161b provided in the payout control apparatus 161 is operated. Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure which performs the said disconnection short circuit monitoring only about the detection part for detecting a game ball in the disconnection short circuit monitoring of the payout ball detection sensor 138, and a detection part for detecting a game ball, It is good also as a structure which performs a disconnection short circuit monitoring about both with the detection part for detecting an electromagnetic wave. Moreover, when disconnection / short-circuit monitoring is performed for both detection units in this way, it is possible to specify which detection unit has a disconnection or short-circuit, and which is detected when disconnection or short-circuit occurrence is specified. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports in the aspect which can specify whether the said abnormality has generate | occur | produced in the part.

  (34) In the case where any notification is made on the status display unit 161a of the payout control device 161, the blinking display is performed, and the update cycle of the blinking display is a constant cycle regardless of which content is notified. It is good also as a structure. For example, a configuration in which blinking display is performed at a cycle of 400 msec may be employed. In this case, it is possible to perform blinking display on the state display unit 161a while simplifying the processing configuration for controlling the state display unit 161a.

  (35) The commands transmitted from the main control device 81 to the payout control device 161 and the payout control device 161 while making the hardware configuration of the main control device 81 and the payout control device 161 common among models, models, or manufacturers. At least one of the commands transmitted from the main controller 81 to the main controller 81 may be different between models, models, or manufacturers. For example, the command transmitted from the main control device 81 to the payout control device 161 is different between models, between models, or between manufacturers, while the command transmitted from the payout control device 161 to the main control device 81 is between models. A common configuration between models or manufacturers is conceivable. In the case where the main control device 81 and the payout control device 161 are installed in different models, types, or manufacturers of pachinko machines while improving the versatility of the main control device 81 and the payout control device 161 by adopting the above configuration. The possibility that the game will continue as it is is reduced.

  (36) In place of the configuration in which the payout of the game ball is completely stopped when the lower tray 34 is in a full state or when the tank 121 is in a no-ball state, the payout speed is extremely high although it is not stopped. It is good also as a structure which will be in the state where payout of a game ball is not performed substantially by becoming late. The payout speed is set to a low speed state when the lower plate 34 is likely to be in a full state, or a low speed state when the tank 121 is likely to be in a ballless state. In this case, the speed is slower than the payout speed.

  (37) Instead of the configuration in which the display controller 96 is controlled by the sound emission controller 91 based on the command output from the main controller 81, the display control is performed based on the command output from the main controller 81. The device 96 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 96 are also arbitrary.

  (38) A device for performing a game-turn effect is not limited to the symbol display device 61, and a configuration in which a game-turn effect is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the special figure display unit 62a displays a stop result corresponding to each game result. However, instead of this, the special figure display unit 62a may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed in the special figure display part 62a, and a special figure display part 62a is eventually displayed by displaying a stop result in the special figure display part 62a at random. It is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result is from the display.

  (40) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. First control means (main control device 81) having communication confirmation transmission means (function to execute the process of step S1902 in the main MPU 83) for transmitting communication confirmation information (payment-side communication confirmation command);
Second control means (payout control device 161) having reception confirmation transmitting means (function to execute the process of step S2007 in the payout side MPU 163) for sending reception confirmation information (reception confirmation command) when the communication confirmation information is received. When,
Non-reception handling means (function for executing the processing of step S1814 in the sound light side MPU 93) to be in a non-reception state when the reception confirmation information is not received in the first control means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since the reception confirmation information from the second control means is not transmitted in response to the transmission of the communication confirmation information from the first control means, the reception state is not received. If there is an abnormality in the route between the two control means, it is possible to deal with it. As a result, it is possible to suitably cope with an abnormality between a plurality of control means.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the communication confirmation transmitting unit transmits the communication confirmation information when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature A2, since it is confirmed whether or not a path abnormality has occurred when the supply of operating power is started, there is a possibility that a game may be performed while the path abnormality has occurred. Is reduced.

Feature A3. The non-reception handling means executes notification processing corresponding to whether or not the reception confirmation information has been received by the first control means,
The second control means executes notification processing means for executing notification processing corresponding to whether or not the communication confirmation information has been received in a situation where the communication confirmation information is received (performs the process of step S2009 in the payout side MPU 163). A gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, characterized in that it has a function).

  According to the feature A3, the notification process is executed when the reception confirmation information is not received by the first control means, and the notification process is also executed when the communication confirmation information is not received by the second control means. Is executed. Thus, by confirming the content of the notification by the notification process, the route from the first control unit to the second control unit and the route from the second control unit to the first control unit can be It is possible to specify whether an abnormality has occurred.

  Feature A4. The notification execution unit is configured to execute the notification process so that notification is performed by a notification unit (state display unit 161a) provided in the second control unit. Game machines.

  According to the feature A4, since the second control means itself notifies whether or not a path abnormality has occurred, further information communication is not required for the notification.

  Feature A5. The feature A4 is characterized in that the unreceived response means performs the notification process so that notification is performed in a recognizable manner without opening the inside of the gaming machine or the back of the gaming machine. The gaming machine described.

  According to feature A5, when a path abnormality occurs in any one of the path from the first control means to the second control means and the path from the second control means to the first control means, the gaming machine Since the notification is performed in a recognizable manner without opening the inside or the back of the gaming machine, the gaming hall indicates that some path abnormality has occurred in the path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to make it recognized by the administrator. Then, by confirming the notification unit provided in the second control means, it is possible to identify in which route the route abnormality has occurred.

Feature A6. When receiving the reception confirmation information, the first control means uses the reception confirmation information or information corresponding to the reception confirmation information as confirmation completion information (reception confirmation command after addition processing), and third control means (voice emission control device 91). Confirmation completion transmission means (function to execute the process of step S1203 in the main MPU 83),
The third control means has the non-reception handling means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the non-reception handling means executes notification processing corresponding to whether or not the confirmation completion information has been received.

  According to the feature A6, it is possible to perform notification regarding whether or not a path abnormality has occurred in a configuration in which processing load is distributed.

  Feature A7. Even if the first control means does not receive the reception confirmation information, the game machine according to the feature A6, wherein the first control means does not execute processing on the reception confirmation information.

  According to the feature A7, the processing load of the first control unit can be reduced with respect to the monitoring of the path abnormality.

Feature A8. The communication confirmation transmitting means transmits the communication confirmation information when supply of operating power to the first control means is started,
The non-reception handling means executes a notification process corresponding to whether or not the confirmation completion information is received before a predetermined monitoring period (sound light side second monitoring time) elapses. A gaming machine according to A6 or A7.

  According to the feature A8, in a configuration in which a process for performing notification in the third control unit instead of the first control unit is executed when a path abnormality occurs between the first control unit and the second control unit. The third control means can grasp whether or not a path abnormality has occurred in relation to a predetermined monitoring period measured by itself. In this case, since it is not necessary to transmit information indicating that the reception confirmation information has not been received from the second control means to the third control means, the processing load on the first control means can be reduced. .

Feature A9. When the supply of operating power is started, the third control means monitors whether the confirmation completion information has been received and monitors whether the reception confirmation information has been received by the first control means. The process to be performed is configured to start before the process of transmitting the reception confirmation information in the second control means,
The predetermined monitoring period is longer than a longest period assumed as a period required for the third control unit to normally receive the confirmation completion information after the supply of operating power to the third control unit is started. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, which is set as:

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the third control unit fails to receive the confirmation completion information, and the path between the first control unit and the second control unit is normal. Nevertheless, the possibility that the notification process is executed is reduced.

  Feature A10. The feature A9 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the process for setting the supply start state is started by the third control unit before the second control unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A10, when the supply of operating power is started, the third control means fails to receive the confirmation completion information only by adjusting the start timing of the process for setting the supply start state. Occurrence can be prevented.

Feature A11. The first control means transmits third side communication confirmation information (acoustic light side communication confirmation command) to the third control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started. Third side transmitting means (function for executing the processing of step S1702 in the main MPU 83),
The third control means includes a communication monitoring means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the sound light side MPU 93) for executing a notification process corresponding to whether or not the third side communication confirmation information has been received. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A10, wherein:

  According to feature A11, whether or not a path abnormality has occurred not only in the path between the first control means and the second control means but also in the path between the first control means and the third control means. And a notification process corresponding to whether or not a path abnormality has occurred is executed. As a result, in the configuration in which the third control unit performs notification processing regarding the path abnormality between the first control unit and the second control unit, the path abnormality occurs in the configuration in which the processing load is distributed. When the notification of whether or not there is an abnormality has occurred in any of the path between the first control means and the second control means and the path between the first control means and the third control means It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to specify.

  Feature A12. The game according to Feature A11, wherein the communication monitoring means executes a notification process corresponding to whether or not the third-side communication confirmation information has been received before a specific monitoring period elapses. Machine.

  According to the feature A12, it is possible for the third control unit itself to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the path between the first control unit and the third control unit. Therefore, the configuration for determining whether or not the path abnormality has occurred can be simplified.

  Feature A13. The characteristic A11 or the feature A11, wherein the third control means starts processing before the first control means for setting the supply start state when the supply of operating power is started. A gaming machine according to A12.

  According to the feature A13, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the third control unit fails to receive the third side communication confirmation information.

  Feature A14. The content of the notification by the notification process corresponding to whether or not the confirmation completion information has been received is different from the content of the notification by the notification process corresponding to whether or not the third side communication confirmation information has been received. The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A13, wherein:

  According to the feature A14, when the notification is executed based on the control by the third control unit, the notification is made by the route between the first control unit and the second control unit, and the first control unit and the third control unit. It is possible to specify which route abnormality is related to the route between and.

  Feature A15. The third side transmission means transmits the third side communication confirmation information before the communication confirmation information is transmitted to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A15, the third-side communication confirmation information can be transmitted to the third control unit before the confirmation completion information is transmitted to the third control unit. The transmission of information to the third control means becomes stepwise, and the third control means accurately receives information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration for receiving information. Is possible.

  Feature A16. When the supply of operating power is started, the first control means and the third control means start processing before the second control means for setting the supply start state. A gaming machine according to Feature A15.

  According to the feature A16, when the supply of operating power is started, the transmission of information to the third control means is stepwise only by adjusting the start timing of the process for setting the supply start state. It becomes possible to become.

Feature A17. The communication confirmation transmitting means transmits the communication confirmation information when supply of operating power to the first control means is started,
The non-reception handling means executes notification processing corresponding to whether or not the confirmation completion information has been received before a predetermined monitoring period (sound light side second monitoring time) elapses.
The communication monitoring means executes notification processing corresponding to whether or not the third-side communication confirmation information has been received before the specific monitoring period (sound-light-side first monitoring time) elapses.
The gaming machine according to feature A15 or A16, wherein the end timing of the specific monitoring period is earlier than the end timing of the end timing of the predetermined monitoring period.

  According to the feature A17, it is possible to shift the monitoring period of whether or not the third side communication confirmation information has been received in the third control means and the monitoring period of whether or not the confirmation completion information has been received, and the path abnormality can be detected. It is possible to execute the notification process in the case of identification in a stepwise manner.

Feature A18. The communication method of information transmitted from the second control unit to the first control unit is different from the communication method of information transmitted from the first control unit to the third control unit. ,
When the reception completion information is received, the confirmation completion transmission unit changes the communication method to a communication method directed to the third control unit, and transmits the changed reception confirmation information as the confirmation completion information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A17, wherein the gaming machine is a thing.

  According to the feature A18, even if the communication method from the second control unit to the first control unit and the communication method from the first control unit to the third control unit are different, the former communication method is used. Since the first control means adapts the information to the latter communication method, the confirmation completion information is appropriately transmitted to the third control means triggered by the reception confirmation information transmitted from the second control means. It becomes possible.

Feature A19. The information transmitted from the second control unit to the first control unit is information that is less by a specific byte than the information transmitted from the first control unit to the third control unit,
The confirmation completion transmission unit, when receiving the reception confirmation information, adds information for a specific byte to the reception confirmation information and transmits the information as the confirmation completion information. Game machines.

  According to feature A19, when the reception confirmation information is changed from the second control means to the confirmation completion information that can be handled by the third control means, the first control means uses a specific byte for the information received from the second control means. Therefore, the processing load of the first control means when the information is changed can be reduced.

Feature A20. The second control means transmits information to the first control means in addition to the reception confirmation information,
When the first control unit receives information other than the reception confirmation information and triggers transmission of information to the third control unit, information for a specific specific byte regardless of the type of the information The gaming machine according to Feature A19, characterized in that information on a state to which is added is transmitted toward the third control means.

  According to feature A20, when information is transmitted to the third control unit triggered by the information received from the second control unit, the first control unit has a specific number of bytes common to the information received from the second control unit. Since only the information needs to be added, the processing load of the first control unit can be reduced in the configuration in which the first control unit plays a role of relaying communication.

Feature A21. The first control means is a main control means for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to payout of a game medium has occurred,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A20, wherein the second control means is payout control means for controlling payout of game media based on information transmitted by the main control means.

  According to the feature A21, when an abnormality occurs in the path between the main control means and the payout control means, it is possible to cope with it, so that the game medium can be paid out accurately.

Feature A22. The main-side storage means (main-side RAM 85) that temporarily stores information in the main control means is supplied with power during interruption while the operating power to the gaming machine is cut off, while the payout control means stores information. The payout-side storage means (payout-side RAM 165) for temporarily storing is configured so that no power is supplied during power interruption while operating power to the gaming machine is shut off,
The gaming machine according to Feature A21, wherein the main control means transmits information instructing payout of a game medium when permission information is received from the payout control means.

  According to the feature A22, power is supplied to the main storage unit while power is interrupted, while power is not supplied to the payout storage unit, thereby reducing the cost of supplying power during disconnection. It becomes possible. In addition, when the permission information is received from the payout control means, the information for instructing the payout of the game medium is transmitted from the main control means, so the information corresponding to the payout of the game medium is basically the main side. While storing in the storage means, it becomes possible to move to the payout-side storage means as necessary, and when the supply of operating power is stopped, information corresponding to the payout of game media is erased collectively. Such an inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In this configuration, as described above, if there is an abnormality in the path between the main control means and the payout control means, it is possible to cope with it, so information corresponding to the payout of game media is displayed. It can be handled appropriately.

  Feature A23. In the situation where the reception confirmation information has not been received by the main control means, means for preventing the main control means from sending information instructing the payout of game media (of the main MPU 83 in the third embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature A21 or A22, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2302 and a function of executing the process of step S2402 of the payout side MPU 163 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to feature A23, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that information corresponding to payout of game media is invalidated due to an abnormality in the path between the main control means and the payout control means. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A24. The first control means is a main control means for managing the progress of the game,
The second control means is an open / close monitoring means (payout side MPU 163) for monitoring whether or not the open / close body that allows the inside of the gaming machine or the back of the gaming machine to be exposed toward the front of the gaming machine is open. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, further comprising: a function of executing a main body frame opening signal monitoring process.

  According to the feature A24, in the configuration in which the opening / closing body of the opening / closing body is monitored by the second control means, the feature A1 or the like is provided, and an abnormality occurs in the path between the first control means and the second control means. In this case, since it is possible to cope with this, the first control means can accurately receive the result of the open / close monitoring in the second control means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A24, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C15, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Specific control means (sound emission control device 91) for executing specific control based on information transmitted by the predetermined means (main control device 81),
The specific control means is
A predetermined monitoring for whether or not the predetermined information (reception confirmation command) transmitted by the predetermined means has been received until the predetermined monitoring period (second light-side monitoring time) elapses when the supply of operating power is started. Monitoring means (function for executing the process of step S1812 in the sound light side MPU 93);
Predetermined correspondence means (function to execute the process of step S1814 in the sound light side MPU 93) to be in a non-reception state when the predetermined information is not received before the predetermined monitoring period elapses;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when the supply of operating power is started and the predetermined information is not received from the predetermined means, the specific control means is in a non-reception state, and therefore, between the predetermined means and the specific control means If there is an abnormality in the route or the route between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine component devices, it becomes possible to cope with it at the start of supply of operating power. Therefore, the possibility that the game is continued even though there is an abnormality in any route is reduced.

  Further, since the specific control means is configured to be in a non-reception state when the predetermined information is not received before the predetermined monitoring result elapses when the supply of the operating power is started, the path abnormality is not detected. The specific control means itself can determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the configuration for determining whether or not a path abnormality has occurred can be simplified.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately cope with a path abnormality between apparatuses.

  Feature B2. The game according to Feature B1, wherein the process for setting the supply start state when the supply of operating power is started is started by the specific control means before the predetermined means. Machine.

  According to the feature B2, the occurrence of inconvenience that the specific control means fails to receive the predetermined information simply by adjusting the start timing of the process for setting the supply start state when the supply of the operating power is started. It becomes possible to prevent.

Feature B3. The predetermined means transmits the predetermined information corresponding to whether or not there is an abnormality in a route with another gaming machine component device (payout side MPU 163),
The predetermined monitoring period is assumed as a period required to normally receive the predetermined information after specifying whether or not there is an abnormality in the path between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine component devices. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein the gaming machine is set as a period longer than the longest period.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to reduce a possibility that the specific control unit may be in an unreceived state even though the route between the predetermined unit and the other gaming machine component devices is normal.

Feature B4. The predetermined response means executes notification processing so as to be in the unreceived state,
A restricting means (a first means for restricting a predetermined process in the predetermined means from being executed until it is specified that there is no abnormality in a path between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine component devices. The feature B3 includes a function of executing the process of step S2202 of the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment and a function of executing the process of step S2302 of the main MPU 83 in the third embodiment. Game machines.

  According to the feature B4, execution of a predetermined process is restricted by the predetermined means in response to whether or not there is an abnormality in the route between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine components, and notification is made by the specific control means Processing is executed. As a result, even if a path abnormality as described above occurs, it is possible to allow the manager of the game hall or the like to deal with the path abnormality while suppressing a disadvantage to the player or the like.

Feature B5. The predetermined means is main control means for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to payout of the game medium has occurred,
The other gaming machine component device is payout control means for controlling payout of game media based on information transmitted by the main control means,
The restricting means transmits information instructing the payout of the game medium in the main control means until it is specified that there is no abnormality in the path between the main control means and the payout control means. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the processing is prevented from being executed.

  According to the feature B5, when there is an abnormality in the path between the main control unit and the payout control unit, execution of processing for transmitting information instructing payout of the game medium is restricted in the main control unit. . Then, in such a situation, the notification process is executed in the specific control means. As a result, even if a path abnormality as described above occurs, it is possible to allow a game hall administrator or the like to deal with the path abnormality while suppressing the invalidation of the occurrence of the game medium payout. It becomes.

Feature B6. The predetermined means is main control means for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to payout of the game medium has occurred,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5, wherein the gaming machine component device is payout control means for controlling payout of game media based on information transmitted by the main control means.

  According to the feature B6, when an abnormality occurs in the path between the main control means and the payout control means, it is possible to cope with it, so that the game medium can be paid out accurately.

Feature B7. The main-side storage means (main-side RAM 85) that temporarily stores information in the main control means is supplied with power during interruption while the operating power to the gaming machine is cut off, while the payout control means stores information. The payout-side storage means (payout-side RAM 165) for temporarily storing is configured so that no power is supplied during power interruption while operating power to the gaming machine is shut off,
The gaming machine according to claim B6, wherein the main control unit transmits information instructing to pay out a game medium when permission information is received from the payout control unit.

  According to the feature B7, while the electric power during interruption is supplied to the main storage unit, the electric power during interruption is not supplied to the payout storage unit, thereby reducing the cost of supplying electric power during interruption. It becomes possible. In addition, when the permission information is received from the payout control means, the information for instructing the payout of the game medium is transmitted from the main control means, so the information corresponding to the payout of the game medium is basically the main side. While storing in the storage means, it becomes possible to move to the payout-side storage means as necessary, and when the supply of operating power is stopped, information corresponding to the payout of game media is erased collectively. Such an inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In this configuration, as described above, if there is an abnormality in the path between the main control means and the payout control means, it is possible to cope with it, so information corresponding to the payout of game media is displayed. It can be handled appropriately.

Feature B8. The predetermined means is a main control means for managing the progress of the game,
The gaming machine component device is an open / close monitoring means (payout side MPU 163) for monitoring whether or not the opening / closing body that allows the inside of the gaming machine or the back of the gaming machine to be exposed forward of the gaming machine is open. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, further comprising: a function of executing a main body frame opening signal monitoring process.

  According to the feature B8, in the configuration in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing body is monitored by the gaming machine component device, the above-described feature B1 and the like are provided, and an abnormality occurs in the path between the predetermined means and the gaming machine component device. Therefore, it is possible to accurately receive the result of the open / close monitoring in the gaming machine component device by the predetermined means.

Feature B9. The reception monitoring means is a first reception monitoring means, and the non-reception handling means is a first non-reception handling means for executing a notification process to make the non-reception state,
The predetermined means transmits the predetermined information in correspondence with whether or not there is an abnormality in a route between other gaming machine component devices, and when supply of operating power is started Transmitting specific information (acoustic light side communication confirmation command) that enables confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the path between the specific control means,
The specific control means includes
The second reception monitoring means (in the sound light side MPU 93) for monitoring whether or not the specific information has been received before the specific monitoring period (sound light side first monitoring time) elapses when the supply of operating power is started. The function of executing the process of step S1804),
Second non-reception handling means (function to execute the process of step S1805 in the sound light side MPU 93) for executing a notification process corresponding to whether or not the specific information has been received before the specific monitoring period elapses;
With
Any of the features B1 to B8, wherein the content of the notification by the notification processing of the first unreceived response means is different from the content of the notification by the notification processing of the second unreceived response means The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to feature B9, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred not only in the route between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine components but also in the route between the predetermined means and the specific control means. If an abnormality has occurred, a notification process corresponding to the abnormality is executed. As a result, in the configuration in which the processing for distributing the processing load is performed by performing the notification process when the abnormality occurs in the route between the predetermined unit and the gaming machine component device in the specific control unit, When notification is given, the administrator of the game hall specifies which of the path between the predetermined means and the gaming machine component device and the path between the predetermined means and the specific control means is abnormal It becomes possible to do.

  Feature B10. The predetermined means transmits the specific information before starting a process for specifying whether or not an abnormality has occurred in an electrical path between the other gaming machine component devices. The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein

  According to the feature B10, the specific information can be transmitted to the specific control unit before the predetermined information is transmitted to the specific control unit. Is transmitted in stages, and it is possible to accurately receive information in the specific control means while suppressing the complexity of the configuration for receiving information in the specific control means.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein the end timing of the specific monitoring period is earlier than the end timing of the end timing of the predetermined monitoring period.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to shift the monitoring period of whether the specific information is received by the specific control means and the monitoring period of whether the predetermined information is received, and for notification when the path abnormality is specified Processing can be executed in stages.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A24, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G8, the features H1 to H8, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. First control means (main control device 81), second control means (payout control device 161), and third control means (sound emission control device 91),
After the operating power is supplied to the second control unit, the second control unit is directed toward the first control unit through a specific path (second signal path group SLG2) between the second control unit and the first control unit. 1st transmission means (function to execute processing of Step S2007 in payout side MPU163) which transmits 1 confirmation information (reception confirmation command),
The first control means includes
After the operating power is supplied to the first control means, the second confirmation information (sound light side) is directed toward the third control means through a predetermined path (third signal path group SLG3) with the third control means. Second transmission means (function for executing the processing of step S1702 in the main-side MPU 83),
When the first confirmation information is received, third transmission means (in step S1203 in the main MPU 83) that can transmit the first confirmation information or information corresponding to the first confirmation information to the third control means through the predetermined route. Processing function), and
With
The third control means executes notification processing corresponding to whether or not the first confirmation information or information corresponding to the first confirmation information has been received, and notification processing corresponding to whether or not the second confirmation information has been received. A game machine characterized by comprising confirmation notification executing means for executing the function (the function of executing the processing of steps S1805 and S1814 in the sound light side MPU 93).

  According to the characteristic C1, whether or not a path abnormality has occurred in both the specific path between the first control unit and the second control unit and the predetermined path between the first control unit and the third control unit. Since the monitoring is executed at the start of supply of operating power, the possibility that the game is started despite the abnormality in these paths is reduced. In addition, since the notification process is executed by the third control unit regardless of whether the specific route or the predetermined route is abnormal, the function of executing the notification process is provided by the third control unit. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate handling in designing the execution function of the notification process. As described above, it is possible to appropriately cope with a path abnormality between apparatuses.

  Feature C2. The third control means receives the first confirmation information or information corresponding thereto and the second confirmation information in a predetermined order when both the specific route and the predetermined route are normal. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature C2, since the reception of information that is a determination element for determining whether or not to perform the notification process regarding the path abnormality is performed in stages, the configuration for receiving the information in the third control unit is complicated. It is possible to accurately receive information in the third control means while suppressing the above.

  Feature C3. The configuration according to C1 or C2, wherein the second transmission unit transmits the second confirmation information before the third transmission unit transmits the first confirmation information or information corresponding thereto. Game machines.

  According to the feature C3, after confirming whether or not there is a path abnormality in a predetermined path between the first control means and the third control means, between the first control means and the second control means It is possible to check whether there is a path abnormality in the specific path.

  Feature C4. When the supply of operating power is started, the third control means starts processing before the first control means and the second control means for setting the supply start state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the third control unit fails to receive the first confirmation information or the information corresponding to the first confirmation information or the second confirmation information.

  Feature C5. The feature C4 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the process for setting the supply start state is started by the first control unit before the second control unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the first control information fails to receive the first confirmation information.

  Feature C6. The content of notification by the notification process corresponding to whether or not the first confirmation information or information corresponding thereto has been received, and the content of notification by the notification process corresponding to whether or not the second confirmation information has been received, The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the game machines are different from each other.

  According to the feature C6, when the notification is executed based on the control by the third control unit, the notification is performed by the specific route between the first control unit and the second control unit, the first control unit, and the third control. It is possible to specify which path abnormality is related to the predetermined path to the means.

Feature C7. The first control unit communicates toward the second control unit through a special path (first signal path group SLG1) between the first control unit and the second control unit after operating power is supplied to the first control unit. Communication confirmation transmission means for transmitting confirmation information (payment-side communication confirmation command) (function to execute the process of step S1902 in the main MPU 83),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the first transmission unit transmits the first confirmation information when the communication confirmation information is received.

  According to the feature C7, in a configuration in which bidirectional communication is performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, it is possible to monitor a path abnormality regarding the bidirectional communication.

Feature C8. The confirmation notification execution means includes
First confirmation notification execution means (sound) for executing notification processing corresponding to whether or not the first confirmation information or information corresponding to the first confirmation information has been received before the predetermined monitoring period (sound light side first monitoring time) elapses The function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the optical side MPU 93),
Second confirmation notification executing means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) for executing notification processing corresponding to whether or not the second confirmation information has been received before the specific monitoring period (sound light side second monitoring time) elapses. The function of executing the processing of S1814);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein an end timing of the specific monitoring period is earlier than an end timing of the end timing of the predetermined monitoring period.

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to shift the monitoring period as to whether or not the second confirmation information has been received by the third control means and the monitoring period as to whether or not the first confirmation information or information corresponding thereto has been received. Thus, it is possible to perform the notification process in a stepwise manner when a path abnormality is specified.

Feature C9. The communication method of information transmitted from the second control unit to the first control unit is different from the communication method of information transmitted from the first control unit to the third control unit. ,
The third transmission means, when receiving the first confirmation information, changes the communication method to a communication method directed to the third control means, and transmits the information after the change. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

  According to the feature C9, even if the communication method from the second control unit to the first control unit is different from the communication method from the first control unit to the third control unit, the former communication method Since the first control means adapts the information to the latter communication method, the information should be appropriately transmitted to the third control means triggered by the first confirmation information transmitted from the second control means. Is possible.

Feature C10. The information transmitted from the second control unit to the first control unit is information that is less by a specific byte than the information transmitted from the first control unit to the third control unit,
When the first confirmation information is received, the third transmission means transmits information obtained by adding information for a specific byte to the first confirmation information. The gaming machine according to C9, .

  According to feature C10, when changing the first confirmation information from the second control means to information that can be handled by the third control means, the first control means sends a specific byte to the first confirmation information from the second control means. Therefore, the processing load of the first control means when the information is changed can be reduced.

Feature C11. The second control means is for transmitting information to the first control means in addition to the first confirmation information,
When the first control unit receives information other than the first confirmation information and triggers transmission of the information to the third control unit, the first control unit is configured to share a specific specific byte regardless of the type of the information. The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein the information with the information added is transmitted to the third control means.

  According to the feature C11, when information is transmitted to the third control unit in response to the information received from the second control unit, the first control unit has a specific number of bytes common to the information received from the second control unit. Since only the information needs to be added, the processing load of the first control unit can be reduced in the configuration in which the first control unit plays a role of relaying communication.

Feature C12. The first control means is a main control means for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to payout of a game medium has occurred,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the second control means is payout control means for controlling payout of game media based on information transmitted by the main control means.

  According to the feature C12, when an abnormality occurs in the path between the main control means and the payout control means, it is possible to deal with it, so that the game medium can be paid out accurately.

Feature C13. The main-side storage means (main-side RAM 85) that temporarily stores information in the main control means is supplied with power during interruption while the operating power to the gaming machine is cut off, while the payout control means stores information. The payout-side storage means (payout-side RAM 165) for temporarily storing is configured so that no power is supplied during power interruption while operating power to the gaming machine is shut off,
The game machine according to Feature C12, wherein the main control means transmits information instructing payout of a game medium when permission information is received from the payout control means.

  According to the feature C13, the power during interruption is supplied to the main storage unit, while the power during interruption is not supplied to the payout storage unit, thereby reducing the cost of supplying electric power during interruption. It becomes possible. In addition, when the permission information is received from the payout control means, the information for instructing the payout of the game medium is transmitted from the main control means, so the information corresponding to the payout of the game medium is basically the main side. While storing in the storage means, it becomes possible to move to the payout-side storage means as necessary, and when the supply of operating power is stopped, information corresponding to the payout of game media is erased collectively. Such an inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In this configuration, as described above, if there is an abnormality in the path between the main control means and the payout control means, it is possible to cope with it, so information corresponding to the payout of game media is displayed. It can be handled appropriately.

Feature C14. After the operating power is supplied to the first control unit, the first control unit communicates with the second control unit through the special path (third signal path group SLG3) to the second control unit. Communication confirmation transmission means for transmitting confirmation information (payment-side communication confirmation command) (function to execute the process of step S1902 in the main MPU 83),
The first transmission means transmits the first confirmation information when the communication confirmation information is received;
In the situation where the first confirmation information has not been received by the main control means, means for preventing the main control means from sending information instructing the payout of game media (the main MPU 83 in the third embodiment) The game machine according to the feature C12 or C13, further including a function of executing the process of step S2302 of FIG. 5 and a function of executing the process of step S2402 of the payout side MPU 163 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature C14, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that information corresponding to the payout of the game medium is invalidated due to an abnormality in the path between the main control means and the payout control means. It becomes possible to do.

Feature C15. The first control means is a main control means for managing the progress of the game,
The second control means is an open / close monitoring means (payout side MPU 163) for monitoring whether or not the open / close body that allows the inside of the gaming machine or the back of the gaming machine to be exposed toward the front of the gaming machine is open. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C14, wherein the game machine has a function of executing a main body frame opening signal monitoring process.

  According to the feature C15, in the configuration in which the opening / closing body of the opening / closing body is monitored by the second control means, the feature C1 and the like are provided, and an abnormality occurs in the path between the first control means and the second control means. In this case, since it is possible to cope with this, the first control means can accurately receive the result of the open / close monitoring in the second control means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C15, the features A1 to A24, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G8, the features H1 to H8, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. First control means (main control device 81), second control means (payout control device 161), and third control means (sound emission control device 91),
The second control means sends first information (reception confirmation command) to the first control means through a specific path (second signal path group SLG2) between the second control means and the first control means. The first transmission means (step S2007, step S2103, step S2106, step S1115 and step S1108 in the payout side MPU 163) for transmitting a disconnection occurrence command, a short circuit occurrence command, a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, etc. is executed. Function)
The first control means includes
Based on the execution result of the process, the second information (acoustic light side communication confirmation command, change-use command) is sent to the third control means through a predetermined path (third signal path group SLG3) with the third control means. Command, type command, etc.), a second transmission means (function for executing the processing of steps S1702 and S411 in the main MPU 83),
Third transmission means (step S1203, step S1206, step S1209, step S1212, step S1212 in the main side MPU 83) that enables transmission of information to the third control means through the predetermined route when the first information is received The function of executing the processing of S1216 and step S1220),
With
The communication method of information transmitted from the second control unit to the first control unit is different from the communication method of information transmitted from the first control unit to the third control unit. ,
The third transmitting means, when receiving the first information, changes the communication method to a communication method directed to the third control means, and transmits the changed information. To play.

  According to the feature D1, even if the communication method from the second control unit to the first control unit is different from the communication method from the first control unit to the third control unit, the former communication method is used. Since the first control unit adapts information to the latter communication method, it is possible to appropriately transmit information to the third control unit triggered by information transmitted from the second control unit. Become.

Feature D2. The information transmitted from the second control unit to the first control unit is information that is less by a specific byte than the information transmitted from the first control unit to the third control unit,
When the first information is received, the third transmitting means transmits information obtained by adding information for a specific byte to the first information, and the gaming machine according to the feature D1.

  According to the feature D2, when changing the first information from the second control means to information that can be handled by the third control means, the first control means uses a specific byte for the first information received from the second control means. Therefore, the processing load of the first control means when the information is changed can be reduced.

Feature D3. There are multiple types of the first information,
The third transmission means transmits information with the common information added to the third control means regardless of the type of the first information received. A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, when transmitting information to the third control unit triggered by information received from the second control unit, the first control unit adds common information to the information received from the second control unit. Therefore, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in the configuration in which the first control means plays a role of relaying communication.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D3, the features A1 to A24, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G8, the features H1 to H8, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the features A to D can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a plurality of control devices are known. In the gaming machine, the progress of the game is controlled by executing predetermined control in each control device while communicating between the plurality of control devices.

  As a configuration including the plurality of control devices, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including a main control device and a payout control device is known. The main controller determines whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance part provided in the game area, and when the entrance to the entrance part corresponding to the payout of the game ball occurs The award ball command is output from the main control device to the payout control device. The payout control device drives and controls the payout device so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out.

  Also, a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a main control device and an effect control device. In the main control device, when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance portion provided in the game area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a favorable hit state is generated for the player, and an effect corresponding to the lottery result The command is output to the effect control device. In the effect control device, the liquid crystal display device and the speaker are controlled so that the effect corresponding to the effect command is executed, and the effect corresponding to the lottery result is executed.

  Here, when a path abnormality such as a communication path occurs between apparatuses, it is necessary to be able to cope with it appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Main control means (main MPU 83) for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to payout of game media has occurred;
A payout control means (payout side MPU 163) for controlling payout of game media based on the payout transmission information transmitted by the main control means;
With
The payout control means transmits permission information (HI level prize ball permission signal) indicating that the payout transmission information can be received to the main control means (step in the payout side MPU 163). A function of executing the processing of S1606)
The main control means includes a payout transmission means (a function of executing the process of step S603 in the main MPU 83) that transmits the payout transmission information when the permission information is received,
When the supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started, the permission information transmitting unit is in a state where the permission information cannot be transmitted, and a specific event (the tank 121 may be in a ballless state) In the gaming machine, the permission information can be transmitted when the low-speed state of the payout motor 137 is not generated.

  According to the feature E1, since the payout transmission information is transmitted from the main control means when the payout control means is transmitting the permission information, it is not preferable to receive the payout transmission information in the payout control means. It becomes possible to wait for transmission in the main control means, and it is possible to suitably pay out game media.

  In this case, when supply of operating power to the payout control means is started, transmission of the permission information is blocked, so that it is not preferable that the payout control means receives the payout transmission information to the payout control means. Even if the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to reliably prevent the transmission of the payout transmission information. In addition, since the state where the transmission of the permission information is blocked is canceled when it is specified that a specific event has not occurred, it is possible to start the transmission of the payout transmission information in a normal situation. Become.

  The specific event includes an event that occurs when the storage unit that stores the game medium to be paid out to the player is in a ballless state.

Feature E2. When it is specified that the specific event has occurred, specific event information (ball no low speed flag = 1) is stored in the storage means (payout side RAM 165),
The permission information transmission means is a state in which the permission information cannot be transmitted when the specific event information is stored in the storage means.
When supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started, the specific event information is stored in the storage unit so that the permission information cannot be transmitted. E1 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature E2, the transmission of the permission information at the start of the supply of the operating power to the payout control means is blocked by using the configuration for blocking the transmission of the permission information when a specific event occurs in the normal time. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the configuration.

  Feature E3. When the specific event information is stored in the storage unit, the payout control unit executes a low speed setting unit (step S1506 in the payout side MPU 163) that executes the payout of the game medium at a speed slower than normal. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the characteristic E3, in the configuration in which transmission of the permission information is prevented at the start of supply of operating power to the payout control means by using the specific event information, the payout speed that does not further stop payout of the game medium Can be made slower.

Feature E4. When it is specified that a predetermined event (a stop state of the dispensing motor 137 when the lower plate 34 is in a full state) different from the specific event is generated, the predetermined event information (full tank flag = 1) is A configuration stored in the storage means,
The permission information transmitting means is in a state in which the permission information cannot be transmitted not only when the specific event information is stored in the storage means but also when the predetermined event information is stored in the storage means. And
The payout control means includes a stop setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1507 in the payout side MPU 163) to stop payout of game media when the predetermined event information is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that

  According to the feature E4, when the transmission of the permission information at the start of the supply of the operating power to the payout control means is blocked using the configuration for blocking the transmission of the permission information in the normal time, the predetermined event information is not used. By using the specific event information, it becomes possible not to start the transmission of the payout transmission information without stopping the payout of the game medium.

  Note that the predetermined event includes an event that occurs when the storage unit that stores the game medium paid out to the player is full.

Feature E5. Specific inhibition status detection means (ball non-detection sensor 123a) for detecting the occurrence of a specific inhibition status that inhibits payout of game media;
Predetermined inhibition state detection means (full tank detection sensor 147) for detecting occurrence of a predetermined inhibition state that inhibits the payout of game media;
In a situation where the specific event information is stored in the storage means, a period in which the detection result of the specific inhibition status detection means is a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific inhibition status is a specific period Specific deletion means (a function of executing the process of step S2511 of the payout side MPU 163 in the fifth embodiment) to delete the specific event information when reaching
The predetermined event information is stored in the storage unit when a period in which the detection result of the predetermined inhibition state detection unit is a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined inhibition state reaches a predetermined period. Predetermined storage execution means (function to execute the process of step S910 in the payout side MPU 163);
With
The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein the predetermined period is shorter than the specific period at least immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started.

  According to the characteristic E5, when the supply of the operating power to the payout control unit is started, the specific event information is deleted before the specific event information is erased when the specific inhibition status is not obtained. Information can be stored, and a state where transmission of permission information is blocked can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the payout transmission information is transmitted in spite of the fact that it is in a predetermined inhibition state.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein the predetermined period is set to be shorter immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started than in a subsequent situation.

  According to the feature E6, it is preferable that the period required for storing the predetermined event information when the predetermined inhibition state is reached, and that the permission information transmission blocking state be set immediately after the operation power supply is started. It is possible to accurately determine that a predetermined event has occurred at a normal time thereafter, while maintaining it.

Feature E7. When the specific event information is stored in the storage unit, the payout control unit executes a low speed setting unit (step S1506 in the payout side MPU 163) that executes the payout of the game medium at a speed slower than normal. Function)
Inhibiting condition detecting means (ball non-detecting sensor 123a) for detecting the occurrence of a specific inhibiting condition that inhibits the payout of game media,
The specific event is an event in which the occurrence of the specific inhibition status is detected over a first duration period by the inhibition status detection means,
The predetermined event is an event in which the occurrence of the specific inhibition situation is detected over a second duration longer than the first duration by the inhibition status detection unit. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

  According to the feature E7, when the period during which the occurrence of the specific inhibition state is detected by the inhibition state detection means becomes the first continuation period, the payout speed of the game medium is slowed down, and the second longer than that. When the duration is reached, the payout of game media is stopped. As a result, when occurrence of a specific obstruction situation is detected, it is possible to deal with it in a step-by-step manner regarding the payout of game media. In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the permission information while preventing the payout of the game medium from being stopped when the supply of the operating power is started using this configuration.

  Feature E8. The main-side storage means (main-side RAM 85) that temporarily stores information in the main control means is supplied with power during interruption while the operating power to the gaming machine is cut off, while the payout control means stores information. Any one of the characteristics E1 to E7 is characterized in that the payout-side storage means (payout-side RAM 165) for temporarily storing is configured such that no electric power is supplied during power interruption while the operating power to the gaming machine is cut off. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E8, power is supplied to the main-side storage unit while power is not supplied to the payout-side storage unit, thereby reducing the cost of supplying power during interruption. It becomes possible. In addition, when the permission information is received from the payout control means, the information for instructing the payout of the game medium is transmitted from the main control means, so the information corresponding to the payout of the game medium is basically the main side. While storing in the storage means, it is possible to move to the payout-side storage means as necessary, and when the supply of operating power is started, information corresponding to the payout of game media is erased collectively. Such an inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E8, the features A1 to A24, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D3, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G8, the features H1 to H8, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature E group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, a main control device and a payout control device are provided, and a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device to the payout control device when a game medium provision condition is satisfied, and the payout control device There is known a configuration in which a payout device is driven and controlled so that game media corresponding to a ball command is paid out to a player.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the main controller determines whether or not a game ball has entered a ball entering section provided in the game area, and enters the ball entering section related to paying out the game ball. When the occurrence of the award, a prize ball command is output from the main control device to the payout control device. The payout control device drives and controls the payout device so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is necessary to suitably perform the game medium payout control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Payout control means (payout side MPU 163) for controlling payout of game media;
Predetermined inhibition state detection means (full tank detection sensor 147) for detecting occurrence of a predetermined inhibition state that inhibits the payout of game media;
Predetermined event information (full flag = 1) is stored in the storage means (payout side) based on the detection result of the predetermined inhibition status detection means being the occurrence response detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined inhibition status RAM165) predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of step S908 and step S910 in the payout side MPU 163),
With
When the predetermined event information is stored in the storage means, the payout control means makes a positive determination in step S1502 in the payout side MPU 163 and restricts payout of game media and executes the process of step S1507 Function)
It is provided with a mode setting means (a function for executing the process of step S904 in the payout side MPU 163) to change the continuation mode of the occurrence response detection result that triggers the storage execution of the predetermined event information depending on the situation. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of a predetermined inhibition situation by setting the continuation mode of the occurrence response detection result to a relatively long continuation mode. By adopting a relatively short continuation mode, it becomes possible to quickly limit the payout of game media for detection of occurrence of a predetermined inhibition situation. In this case, a situation in which it is important to accurately detect the occurrence of a predetermined inhibition situation because the continuation mode of the occurrence response detection result that triggers the storage execution of the predetermined event information is different depending on the situation And a situation in which it is important to restrict the payout of game media at an early stage with respect to the occurrence of a predetermined inhibition situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to limit the payout of the game medium with respect to the occurrence of the predetermined inhibition situation, and to appropriately cope with the occurrence of the predetermined inhibition situation.

  Note that the game media payout limitation includes a mode in which the game media payout is stopped and a mode in which the game media payout speed is stopped.

  Feature F2. The mode setting unit has a shorter continuation mode of the occurrence response detection result that triggers storage execution of the predetermined event information immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started than in the subsequent situation. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the gaming machine is a continuation mode.

  According to the feature F2, when the supply of operating power is started in a state where a predetermined inhibition situation occurs, a situation unintended by the designer occurs by restricting the payout of the game medium at an early stage. The possibility is reduced. On the other hand, when it is not immediately after the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not a predetermined inhibition situation has occurred.

  Feature F3. The continuation mode set by the period setting unit immediately after the supply of operating power to the payout control unit is a period shorter than a game ball payout period in a situation where the restriction by the restriction unit is not performed. It is a mode that triggers storage execution of the predetermined event information, and the continuation mode set by the period setting unit in a subsequent situation is based on a payout period of game balls in a situation where the restriction by the restriction unit is not performed The gaming machine according to Feature F2, wherein the gaming machine is an aspect that triggers storage execution of the predetermined event information over a long period of time.

  According to the feature F3, when the supply of the operating power is started in a state where a predetermined inhibition situation has occurred, the number of game media to be newly paid out is “0” or minimized. Is possible.

  Feature F4. The mode setting unit sets a relatively short continuation mode as a continuation mode of the occurrence response detection result that triggers storage execution of the predetermined event information when supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started. When the detection result of the predetermined inhibition state detection unit becomes a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined inhibition state after the supply of operating power to the payout control unit is started, as the continuation mode The gaming machine according to Feature F2 or F3, wherein a relatively long aspect is set.

  According to feature F4, when the occurrence of a predetermined inhibition state is not detected after the supply of operating power is started, the continuation mode of the occurrence response detection result that triggers the storage execution of the predetermined event information is relatively short The mode is changed from a mode to a relatively long mode. As a result, it is possible to minimize the monitoring period during which the payout of game media is restricted at an early stage when a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined obstruction situation occurs. It is possible to attach importance to accurately monitoring whether or not an inhibition situation has occurred.

Feature F5. A storage unit (lower plate 34) for storing game balls paid out to the player;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined inhibition state is a state in which the storage unit is full.

  According to the feature F5, when the storage unit becomes full, it is possible to diversify the timing for restricting the payout of game media, and it is preferable to cope with the storage unit becoming full. It becomes possible to do.

Feature F6. A gaming machine base body (main body frame 13);
A gaming machine front body (front door frame 14) provided to the gaming machine base body so as to be openable and closable and having the storage section;
With
The predetermined inhibition state detection means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine base body provided with the gaming medium payout means and the payout control means in the gaming machine base body. Game machines.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to consolidate functions related to payout of game media on the back side of the gaming machine base body.

  When the position for detecting whether or not the storage unit is full is present at a position close to the payout means, the supply of operating power is started in the full state, and the game medium is normally discharged. If the operation is continued, there is a possibility that a ball clogging may occur in the dispensing means. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the clogging of the balls while accurately monitoring whether or not the storage portion is full by providing the configuration such as the feature F2. It becomes.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F6, the features A1 to A24, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E8, the features G1 to G8, the features H1 to H8, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, when the game medium payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out toward the ball storage section provided in the front portion of the gaming machine.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage section. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the gaming machine, a condition that triggers the stop of the game medium payout is set, and when the condition is satisfied, the game medium payout is stopped. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a tray storage portion as described above, the game balls are paid out to the tray storage portion via a payout passage provided inside the gaming machine. A full tank detection sensor is provided in the middle of the payout passage, and if it is determined that the dish storage portion is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, more gaming balls The full tank state process is executed so that no payout is performed. As a result, failure of the dispensing device is prevented.

  Here, the control for restricting the payout of the game medium needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Route abnormality detection means (monitoring IC 161c) for detecting a route abnormality between a plurality of gaming machine components,
An abnormality notification execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S2102 and S2105 in the payout side MPU 163, the sound light side MPU 93) for executing an abnormality notification process when a route abnormality is detected by the route abnormality detection means;
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification process is terminated on the condition that the supply of operating power to the abnormality notification execution means is stopped.

  According to the feature G1, it is possible to cope with the occurrence of a path abnormality by executing the abnormality notification. Further, since the operation power supply must be stopped when canceling the abnormality notification, even if a route abnormality is illegally generated and the abnormality notification is attempted to be canceled illegally, the action becomes conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of the illegal act.

  Feature G2. The abnormality notification execution unit is configured to execute a monitoring process (disconnection short circuit monitoring process) of a detection result of the path abnormality detection unit when supply of operating power is started. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G2, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the route abnormality monitoring process is executed.

Feature G3. A payout means (payout device 124) for paying out game media;
A payout detection means (a payout ball detection sensor 138) for detecting a game medium paid out by the payout means;
A payout control means (payout side MPU 163) for starting payout of the game medium by the payout means when the game medium payout start condition is satisfied, and stopping payout of the game medium based on the detection result of the payout detection means; ,
With
The path abnormality detection means detects a path abnormality between the payout detection means and the payout control means,
A means for executing a notification process when the payout detecting means does not detect a game medium in spite of the fact that the payout control means performs the driving control of the payout means (the process of step S803 in the payout side MPU 163). The gaming machine according to Feature G2, further comprising a function to be executed.

  According to the feature G3, a path abnormality between the payout control means and the payout detection means is monitored, and when a path abnormality has occurred, an abnormality notification is executed, thereby normally detecting the game medium to be paid out. The possibility that the game will be started in a situation that cannot be performed in a short time is reduced. In this case, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature G2 and the path abnormality monitoring process executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the notification process is performed when the game medium is not paid out normally. Therefore, even if the monitoring process for the path abnormality alone is not performed at the normal time, it is possible to notify when an abnormality has occurred regarding the payout of the game medium including the path abnormality.

  Feature G4. The abnormality notification by the abnormality notification processing is canceled when the operation power supply is stopped, and is not continuously performed when the operation power supply is performed thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature G4, when canceling the abnormality notification about the route abnormality, it is only necessary to execute the operation for stopping the supply of the operating power, and no other operation is required. Workability for canceling the abnormality notification about the route abnormality is improved.

Feature G5. A specific operation means (state return switch 161b) operated when canceling an abnormality detection state different from the path abnormality;
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G4, wherein the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification processing is not canceled even if the specific operation unit is operated.

  According to the feature G5, even if the specific operation means is illegally operated to cancel the abnormal notification of the route abnormality illegally, it can be disabled.

Feature G6. When canceling an abnormality detection state different from the path abnormality, it is necessary to start supplying operating power while operating a predetermined operation means (RAM erasure switch 171a).
Any of the characteristics G1 to G5 is characterized in that the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification process is not continuously performed after the start of the supply of the operating power without requiring the operation of the predetermined operation means when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature G6, when the abnormality notification about the route abnormality is canceled, the operation of the predetermined operation unit is not required, so that the workability when the abnormality notification about the route abnormality is canceled can be improved.

  Feature G7. When the route abnormality is detected by the route abnormality detection means, the abnormality notification process is executed, but the execution of the progression process for advancing the game is not limited. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature G7, when a route abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with it by executing an abnormality notification, while reducing the possibility that a normal player will be disadvantaged due to the route abnormality. It becomes possible.

  Note that the progress process includes a process for monitoring the occurrence of a winning as a trigger for granting a privilege to the player, and a process executed for starting a game.

Feature G8. A payout means (payout device 124) for paying out game media;
A payout detection means (a payout ball detection sensor 138) for detecting a game medium paid out by the payout means;
A payout control means (payout side MPU 163) for starting payout of the game medium by the payout means when the game medium payout start condition is satisfied, and stopping payout of the game medium based on the detection result of the payout detection means; ,
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, wherein the path abnormality detection means detects a path abnormality between the payout detection means and the payout control means.

  According to the feature G8, a path abnormality between the payout control means and the payout detection means is monitored, and when a path abnormality has occurred, an abnormality notification is executed, thereby normally detecting the game medium to be paid out. The possibility that the game will be started in a situation that cannot be performed in a short time is reduced.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G8, the features A1 to A24, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features H1 to H8, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature G group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, various operations are performed by transmitting signals or power between a plurality of devices.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including a main control device and a payout control device is known. The main controller determines whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance area provided in the game area, and when the entrance to the entrance part corresponding to the payout of the game ball occurs The award ball command is transmitted from the main control device to the payout control device.

  The payout control device controls driving of the payout device by receiving a prize ball command. The payout device includes a ball stop member that operates in accordance with the drive signal transmitted from the payout control device and guides the game ball to the downstream side, and a game ball that is drawn or led to the downstream side by the ball stop member. A payout detection sensor or the like for detection is provided. The payout control device measures the number of game balls to be paid out based on the detection signal transmitted by the payout detection sensor, and stops the game ball payout operation by the ball stopper when the number of game balls to be paid out is specified. Let

  Here, it is conceivable that disconnection or connection abnormality occurs in the power path or signal path between the devices, and it is necessary to appropriately deal with such path abnormality.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A gaming machine base body (main body frame 13) supported by an outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having a game medium payout means;
A gaming machine front body (front door frame 14) provided to be opened and closed on the gaming machine base body;
Base opening / closing detection means (main body frame opening sensor 114) for detecting an opening / closing state of the gaming machine base body with respect to the outer frame;
When it is specified using the detection result of the base opening / closing detection means that the gaming machine base body is in the open state, the payout restricting means for restricting the payout of game media by the payout means (in step S1501 in the payout side MPU 163) A function of making an affirmative determination and executing the process of step S1507),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, payout of game media by the payout means is restricted when the gaming machine base body is opened. As a result, even if the gaming machine base body is opened in a situation where the gaming machine is refilled from the island facility to the gaming machine or when the storage unit provided in the front of the gaming machine is in the discharged state, In addition, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that game media replenished from the island facility is scattered or game media paid out toward the storage unit is scattered.

  Note that the game media payout limitation includes a mode in which the game media payout is stopped and a mode in which the game media payout speed is stopped.

Feature H2. Main control means (main control device 81) for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to payout of game media has occurred;
A payout control means (payout control device 161) that drives and controls the payout means so that a game medium is paid out based on information transmitted by the main control means;
With
The detection result of the base open / close detection means is input to the payout control means, and the payout control means executes monitoring processing of the detection result of the base open / close detection means, and the payout control means has the payout restricting means. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, characterized by:

  According to the feature H2, in a configuration in which payout of game media is restricted when the gaming machine base body is opened, the detection result of the base open / close detection means is input to the payout control means. This eliminates the need for the payout control means to receive information from the main control means when specifying whether or not the gaming machine base body is in an open state, and when the gaming machine base body is in an open state, The configuration for restricting the payout can be simplified.

Feature H3. Front opening / closing detection means (front door frame opening sensor 42) for detecting an opening / closing state of the gaming machine front body with respect to the gaming machine base body,
The detection result of the front open / close detection means is input to the payout control means, and the payout control means executes monitoring processing of the detection result of the front open / close detection means,
The payout restricting means restricts payout of game media by the payout means when it is specified using the detection result of the front opening / closing detection means that the front body of the gaming machine is in an open state. The gaming machine according to Feature H2, which is characterized.

  According to the feature H3, the payout control means consolidates the processing for performing the opening monitoring of the gaming machine front body and the gaming machine base body, and the processing for restricting the payout of the game medium in the open state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main control means.

Feature H4. It has an external terminal for front opening / closing recognition (external terminal 113h for opening the front door) that makes the opening / closing state of the gaming machine front body recognizable to the outside of the gaming machine,
The front opening / closing detection means and the front opening / closing recognition external terminal are electrically connected, and the detection result of the front opening / closing detection means is used as recognition information without the control by the payout control means. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be externally output from an external terminal.

  According to the feature H4, there is no need to execute any processing in the payout control means when outputting the recognition information as to whether or not the gaming machine front body is in the open state. Thereby, it is possible to externally output information for recognition as to whether or not the gaming machine front body is in an open state while reducing the processing load.

Feature H5. The payout control means is configured to externally output the state of the gaming machine using an external terminal provided on the external terminal means (external terminal plate 113).
The gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein the external terminal for front opening / closing recognition is provided in the external terminal means.

  According to the feature H5, the external output of the information for recognizing whether or not the front body of the gaming machine is in the open state is provided on the front even if the payout control means performs the external output using the external terminal means. By performing directly from the opening / closing detection means, the processing load of the payout control means can be reduced.

Feature H6. Comprising an external terminal for base opening / closing recognition (external terminal 113g for opening the main body) that makes the opening / closing state of the gaming machine base body recognizable outside the gaming machine;
The base open / close detecting means and the base open / close recognizing external terminal are electrically connected, and the detection result of the base open / close detecting means is used as recognition information for the base open / close recognizing information without being controlled by the control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be externally output from an external terminal.

  According to the feature H6, there is no need to execute any processing in the control means when outputting the recognition information as to whether or not the gaming machine base body is in the open state. Thereby, it is possible to externally output information for recognition as to whether or not the gaming machine base body is in an open state while reducing the processing load.

Feature H7. The control means having the detection result of the base opening / closing detection means and having the payout restricting means is configured to output the state of the gaming machine externally using an external terminal provided on the external terminal means (external terminal plate 113). Yes,
The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the external terminal for base opening / closing recognition is provided in the external output means.

  According to the feature H7, the external opening of the information for recognizing whether or not the gaming machine base body is in the open state can be opened / closed even if the external output means is used in the control means. By performing directly from the detection means, the processing load on the control means can be reduced.

Feature H8. The gaming machine front body includes a storage unit (lower plate 34) for storing game media paid out to the player,
The storage unit includes a discharge operation unit (discharge operation unit 35) that allows the game medium stored in the storage unit to be discharged out of the gaming machine,
Any one of the features H1 to H7, wherein the game machine base body can be opened even when the storage unit is in a state in which the game medium can be discharged by the discharge operation unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature H8, even if the gaming machine base body is opened in a state where the storage unit is in the discharged state, the game medium paid out toward the storage unit at that time is scattered. Is prevented from occurring.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H8, features A1 to A24, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C15, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G8, features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the above-described feature group H can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines are known as a kind of gaming machine. A pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a gaming machine body that is supported by an outer frame so as to be opened and closed, and a gaming machine front body that is supported by the gaming machine body so as to be opened and closed. The gaming machine main body is provided with a control device that executes various controls, a payout device that executes payout of game balls, etc., and a launch operation device for performing a game ball launch operation on the front side of the gaming machine, In addition, a dish storage unit or the like for storing game balls is provided. In addition, the tray storage unit is provided with a discharge operation unit, and when the discharge operation is performed on the discharge operation unit, the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine. .

  In addition, there is also a configuration provided with an upper dish storage part and a lower dish storage part as a dish storage part, in this case, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage part is stored in the lower dish storage part, When the discharge operation is performed on the lower dish storage unit, the game balls stored in the lower dish storage unit are discharged.

  Here, there are cases where the opening operation of the gaming machine main body is performed in a situation where a game is being played by the player, but it is preferable that the opening operation is highly workable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Event detection means (front door frame opening sensor 42, body frame opening sensor 114) for detecting whether or not a detection corresponding event has occurred;
An external terminal for correspondence recognition (an external terminal 113g for opening the main body, an external terminal 113h for opening the front door) that makes it possible to recognize outside the gaming machine whether or not the detection correspondence event has occurred;
With
The event detection means and the correspondence recognition external terminal are electrically connected, and the detection result of the event detection means is used as the recognition information without the control by the control means. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be output from the outside.

  According to the feature I1, since the recognition information that makes it possible to recognize whether or not a detection response event has occurred is output to the outside, it is possible to manage whether or not a detection response event has occurred on the game hall side. In this case, there is no need to execute any processing in the control means when outputting the recognition information as to whether or not a detection response event has occurred. As a result, it is possible to externally output recognition information as to whether or not a detection-corresponding event has occurred while reducing the processing load.

Feature I2. Event detection means (front door frame opening sensor 42, body frame opening sensor 114) for detecting whether or not a detection corresponding event has occurred;
When the detection result of the event detection means is a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the detection corresponding event, the corresponding control means for executing the corresponding processing (main frame opening monitoring processing and front door frame opening monitoring in the payout side MPU 163) Processing function), and
An external terminal for correspondence recognition (an external terminal 113g for opening the main body, an external terminal 113h for opening the front door) that makes it possible to recognize outside the gaming machine whether or not the detection correspondence event has occurred;
With
The event detection means and the correspondence recognition external terminal are electrically connected, and the detection result of the event detection means is used as the recognition information as recognition information without being controlled by the correspondence control means. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be externally output from an external terminal.

  According to the feature I2, when the occurrence of the detection-corresponding event is detected by the event detecting means, the corresponding processing is executed, so that the game machine can perform an operation corresponding to the occurrence of the detection-corresponding event. It becomes possible. Further, since the recognition information for enabling recognition of whether or not a detection response event has occurred is output to the outside, it is possible to manage whether or not a detection response event has occurred on the game hall side.

  In this case, there is no need to execute any processing in the response control means when outputting the recognition information as to whether or not a detection response event has occurred. As a result, it is possible to externally output recognition information as to whether or not a detection-corresponding event has occurred while reducing the processing load.

Feature I3. The correspondence control means is configured to externally output the state of the gaming machine using an external terminal provided on the external terminal means (external terminal plate 113),
The gaming machine according to the characteristic I2, wherein the external terminal for correspondence recognition is provided in the external terminal means.

  According to the feature I3, even when the response control unit is configured to perform external output using the external terminal unit, the event detection unit is configured to output the information for recognizing whether or not a detection response event has occurred. The processing load of the response control means can be reduced by performing directly from the above.

Feature I4. As the event detection means, a first event detection means (front door frame opening sensor 42) for detecting whether or not a first detection response event has occurred, and whether or not a second detection response event has occurred. Second event detecting means (main body frame opening sensor 114) for detecting,
When the detection result of the first event detection unit is a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the first detection response event, the response control unit executes a first response process corresponding to the detection result, and the second event detection unit If the detection result is a detection result corresponding to the occurrence of the second detection response event, a second response process corresponding to the detection result is executed.
An external terminal for first correspondence recognition (external terminal 113h for opening the front door) that makes it possible to recognize to the outside of the gaming machine whether or not the first detection correspondence event has occurred as the external terminal for correspondence recognition A second correspondence recognition external terminal (external terminal 113g for opening the main body) that makes it possible to recognize outside the gaming machine whether or not the second detection correspondence event has occurred,
Using the first branch path branched from the path provided between the first event detection means and the correspondence control means, the first event detection means and the external terminal for first correspondence recognition Electrically connected,
Using the second branch path branched from the path provided between the second event detecting means and the correspondence control means, the second event detecting means and the second terminal for recognizing the second correspondence are Electrically connected,
The gaming machine according to I2 or I3, wherein the branch start position of the first branch path and the branch start position of the second branch path exist in one relay means (signal relay board 185). .

  According to the characteristic I4, in the configuration in which information is output from each of the first event detection unit and the second event detection unit to the corresponding control unit and information is also output to the outside of the gaming machine, the branch position of each route Are integrated into one relay means, so that maintenance and the like can be facilitated.

Feature I5. An opening / closing body (main body frame 13, front door frame 14) capable of exposing the inside of the gaming machine or the back of the gaming machine toward the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I2 to I4, wherein the detection-corresponding event is an event in which the opening / closing body is in an open state.

  According to the characteristic I5, monitoring of whether the open / close body is in the open state is not performed by the processing by the corresponding control means when outputting the information for recognizing whether the open / close body is in the open state. And the game hall side can be performed independently. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in one monitoring path, it is possible to continue monitoring in the other monitoring path, and it is possible to accurately monitor whether the opening / closing body is in an open state. Become.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I5, the features A1 to A24, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G8, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Note that examples of the opening / closing body include a gaming machine base body supported by an outer frame so as to be opened and closed, and a gaming machine front body supported by the gaming machine base body so as to be opened and closed.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature group I can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration including an opening / closing body supported by a support body so as to be opened and closed is known.

  For example, a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a gaming machine body that is supported by an outer frame so as to be opened and closed, and a gaming machine front body that is supported by the gaming machine body so as to be opened and closed. The gaming machine main body is provided with a control device that executes various controls, a payout device that executes payout of game balls, etc., and a launch operation device for performing a game ball launch operation on the front side of the gaming machine, In addition, a dish storage unit or the like for storing game balls is provided.

  Here, when managing the state of the gaming machine in the hall computer of the gaming hall, it is necessary to make the configuration of the external output to be able to perform the management suitable, and this point is still improved There is room for.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes gaming components arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion among the gaming components.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 13 ... Main body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 34 ... Lower plate, 35 ... Discharge operation part, 42 ... Front door frame open sensor, 81 ... Main controller, 82 ... Main control board, 83 ... Main Side MPU, 84 ... main side ROM, 85 ... main side RAM, 91 ... voice light emission control device, 92 ... voice light emission control board, 93 ... sound light side MPU, 94 ... sound light side ROM, 95 ... sound light side RAM, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 113 ... External terminal board, 113g ... External terminal for main body opening, 113h ... External terminal for front door opening, 114 ... Main body frame open sensor, 121 ... Tank, 123a ... Non-ball detection sensor, 124 ... Dispensing device, 137 ... Discharge motor, 138... Discharge ball detection sensor, 147... Full detection sensor, 161... Discharge control device, 161 b. Side ROM, 165 ... dispensing side RAM, 171a ... RAM erase switch, 185 ... signal relay board, SLG1 ... first signal path group, SLG2 ... second signal path group, SLG3 ... third signal path group.

Claims (1)

Specific control means for executing specific control based on information transmitted by the predetermined means,
The predetermined means is
Means for transmitting predetermined information corresponding to whether or not there is an abnormality in a path between other gaming machine components when supply of operating power is started;
Means for transmitting another information to the specific control means when the supply of operating power is started;
With
The specific control means includes
Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not the predetermined information transmitted by the predetermined means has been received before a predetermined monitoring period elapses when supply of operating power is started;
A predetermined response unit configured to be in a predetermined notification state when the predetermined information is not received before the predetermined monitoring period elapses;
Specific monitoring means for monitoring whether or not the different information transmitted by the predetermined means has been received before the specific monitoring period elapses when supply of operating power is started;
Specific correspondence means for causing a specific notification state when the different information is not received before the specific monitoring period has passed;
With
The predetermined monitoring period is assumed as a period required to normally receive the predetermined information after specifying whether or not there is an abnormality in the path between the predetermined means and the other gaming machine component devices. Set to be longer than the longest possible period,
When the supply of the operating power is started, the process for setting the supply start state is started before the specific control means with respect to the predetermined means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification content is different between the predetermined notification state and the specific notification state.

Images